BNBC 2012 Part 6 Chapter 6 and 7 PDF

Chapter 6
Strength Design of Reinforced Concrete
Structures
6.1 Analysis and Design General Considerations
6.1.1 Convention and Notation
Unless otherwise explicitly stated, the following units shall be implicit for the corresponding quantities in
the design and other expressions provided in this chapter:
Lengths mm
Areas m m 2
Second moments of area m m 4
Force (axial, shear) N
Moment, torsion Nmm
Stress, strength MPa, N/mm 2
6.1.1.1 Notation
= Depth of equivalent rectangular stress block as defined in 6.3.2.7.1, mm,
= Shear span, equal to distance from center of concentrated load to either: (a) face of support
for continuous or cantilevered members, or (b) center of support for simply supported
members, mm, Sec 6.4, Appendix A
= Area of an individual bar or wire, mm2, Sec 6.3, Sec 8.2
= Net bearing area of the head of stud, anchor bolt, or headed deformed bar, mm2, Sec 8.2,
Appendix D
= Cross‐sectional area of concrete section resisting shear transfer, mm2, Sec 6.4, Sec 8.3
= Cross‐sectional area of a structural member measured to the outside edges of transverse
reinforcement, mm2, Sec 6.3, Sec 8.3
= Area enclosed by outside perimeter of concrete cross section, mm2, see 6.4.4.1, Sec 6.4,
8.3.8.3
= Cross‐sectional area at one end of a strut in a strut‐and‐tie model, taken perpendicular to the
axis of the strut, mm2, Appendix A
= Gross area of concrete section bounded by web thickness and length of section in the
direction of shear force considered, mm2, Sec 8.3
= Area of concrete section of an individual pier, horizontal wall segment, or coupling beam
resisting shear, mm2, Sec 8.3
= Area of reinforcement in bracket or corbel resisting factored moment, mm2, see 6.4.7, Sec
6.4
= Gross area of concrete section, mm2 For a hollow section, is the area of the concrete only
and does not include the area of the void(s), see 6.4.4.1, Secs 6.2 to 6.4, 6.6, 6.7, 6.10, 8.3,
= Total area of shear reinforcement parallel to primary tension reinforcement in a corbel or
bracket, mm2, see 6.4.7, Sec 6.4
= Effective cross‐sectional area within a joint in a plane parallel to plane of reinforcement
generating shear in the joint, mm2, see Sec 8.3
= Total area of longitudinal reinforcement to resist torsion, mm2, Sec 6.4, 8.3
, = Minimum area of longitudinal reinforcement to resist torsion, mm2, see 6.4.4.5.3, Sec 6.4
Part 6
Structural Design 6‐1

Part 6
Structural Design

= Area of reinforcement in bracket or corbel resisting tensile force , mm2, see 6.4.7, Sec
6.4
= Area of a face of a nodal zone or a section through a nodal zone, mm2, Appendix A
= Projected concrete failure area of a single anchor or group of anchors, for calculation of
strength in tension, mm2, see D.5.2.1, Appendix D
= Projected concrete failure area of a single anchor, for calculation of strength in tension if
not limited by edge distance or spacing, mm2, see D.5.2.1, Appendix D
= Gross area enclosed by shear flow path, mm2, Sec 6.4
= Area enclosed by centerline of the outermost closed transverse torsional reinforcement, mm2,
Sec 6.4
= Area of nonprestressed longitudinal tension reinforcement, mm2, Sec 6.3, 6.4, 6.6, 6.8,
= Area of tension reinforcement corresponding to moment of resistance , see 6.3.15.1(b)
= Area of additional tension steel, see 6.3.15.1(b)
= Area of compression reinforcement, mm2, Appendix A
= Area of primary tension reinforcement in a corbel or bracket, mm2, see 6.4.7.3.5, Sec 6.4
, = Effective cross‐sectional area of anchor in tension, mm2, Appendix D
, = Effective cross‐sectional area of anchor in shear, mm2, Appendix D
= Area of reinforcement required to balance the longitudinal compressive force in the
overhanging portion of the flange of a T‐beam, see 6.3.15.2(b)
= Total cross‐sectional area of transverse reinforcement (including crossties) within spacing s
and perpendicular to dimension , mm2, Sec 8.3
= Total area of surface reinforcement at spacing si in the i‐th layer crossing a strut, with
reinforcement at an angle to the axis of the strut, mm2, Appendix A
, = Minimum area of flexural reinforcement, mm2, see 6.3.5, Sec 6.3
= Total area of nonprestressed longitudinal reinforcement (bars or steel shapes), mm2, Sec
6.3, 8.3
= Area of structural steel shape, pipe, or tubing in a composite section, mm2, Sec 6.3
= Area of one leg of a closed stirrup resisting torsion within spacing s, mm2, Sec 6.4
= Area of prestressing steel in a tie, mm2, Appendix A
= Total cross‐sectional area of all transverse reinforcement within spacing s that crosses the
potential plane of splitting through the reinforcement being developed, mm2, Sec 8.2
= Area of nonprestressed reinforcement in a tie, mm2, Appendix A
= Area of shear reinforcement spacing s, mm2, Sec 6.4, 6.12
= Projected concrete failure area of a single anchor or group of anchors, for calculation of
strength in shear, mm2, see D.6.2.1, Appendix D
= Projected concrete failure area of a single anchor, for calculation of strength in shear, if not
limited by corner influences, spacing, or member thickness, mm2, see D.6.2.1, Appendix D
= Total area of reinforcement in each group of diagonal bars in a diagonally reinforced coupling
beam, mm2, Sec 8.3
= Area of shear‐friction reinforcement, mm2, Sec 6.4, 8.3
= Area of shear reinforcement parallel to flexural tension reinforcement within spacing ,
mm2, Sec 6.4
,
2
= Minimum area of shear reinforcement within spacing s, mm , see 6.4.3.5.1 and 6.4.3.5.3,
Sec 6.4
= Loaded area, mm2, Sec 6.3
= Area of the lower base of the largest frustum of a pyramid, cone, or tapered wedge
contained wholly within the support and having for its upper base the loaded area, and having
side slopes of 1 vertical to 2 horizontal, mm2 , Sec 6.3
= Width of compression face of member, mm, Sec 6.3
= Perimeter of critical section for shear in slabs and footings, mm, see 6.4.10.1.2, Sec 6.4
= Width of strut, mm, Appendix A
= Width of that part of cross section containing the closed stirrups resisting torsion, mm, Sec
6‐2 Vol. 2
Chapter 1
Ultimate Strength Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures
6.4
= Width of cross section at contact surface being investigated for horizontal shear, mm, Sec
6.12
= Web width, or diameter of circular section, mm, Sec 6.3, 6.4, 8.2, 8.3
= Dimension of the critical section measured in the direction of the span for which moments
are determined, mm, Sec 6.5
= Dimension of the critical section measured in the direction perpendicular to , mm, Sec 6.5
= Distance from extreme compression fiber to neutral axis, mm, Sec 6.2, 6.3, 6.6, 8.3
= Critical edge distance required to develop the basic concrete breakout strength of a post‐
installed anchor in uncracked concrete without supplementary reinforcement to control
splitting, mm, see D.8.6, Appendix D
, = Maximum distance from center of an anchor shaft to the edge of concrete, mm, Appendix D
, = Minimum distance from center of an anchor shaft to the edge of concrete, mm, Appendix D
= Distance from the center of an anchor shaft to the edge of concrete in one direction, mm. If
shear is applied to anchor, is taken in the direction of the applied shear. If tension is
applied to the anchor, is the minimum edge distance, appendix d
= Distance from center of an anchor shaft to the edge of concrete in the direction perpen‐
dicular to , mm, Appendix D
= Smaller of: (a) the distance from center of a bar or wire to nearest concrete surface, and (b)
one‐half the center‐to‐center spacing of bars or wires being developed, mm, Sec 8.2
= Clear cover of reinforcement, mm, see 6.3.6.4, Sec 6.3
= Distance from the interior face of the column to the slab edge measured parallel to c1, but not
exceeding , mm, Sec 8.3
= Dimension of rectangular or equivalent rectangular column, capital, or bracket
measured in the direction of the span for which moments are being determined, mm, Sec
6.4, 6.5, 8.3
= Dimension of rectangular or equivalent rectangular column, capital, or bracket
measured in the direction perpendicular to , mm, Sec 6.5
= Cross‐sectional constant to define torsional properties of slab and beam, see 6.5.6.4.2, Sec
6.5
= Factor relating actual moment diagram to an equivalent uniform moment diagram, Sec 6.3
= Distance from extreme compression fiber to centroid of longitudinal tension reinforce‐ ment,
mm, Sec 6.2‐6.4, 6.6, 6.12, 8.1‐8.3,
= Distance from extreme compression fiber to centroid of longitudinal compression
reinforcement, mm, Sec 6.2
= Outside diameter of anchor or shaft diameter of headed stud, headed bolt, or hooked bolt,
mm, see D.8.4, Appendix D
= Value substituted for when an oversized anchor is used, mm, see D.8.4, Appendix D
= Nominal diameter of bar, wire, or prestressing strand, mm, Sec 8.1-8.3
= Distance from extreme compression fiber to centroid of prestressing steel, mm, Sec
6.4
= Diameter of pile at footing base, mm, Sec 6.8
= Distance from extreme compression fiber to centroid of extreme layer of longitudinal tension
steel, mm, Sec 6.2, 6.3
= Dead loads, or related internal moments and forces, Sec 6.1, 6.2, 6.11, 8.3
= Distance from the inner surface of the shaft of a J‐ or L‐bolt to the outer tip of the J‐ or L‐bolt, mm,
Appendix D
= Distance between resultant tension load on a group of anchors loaded in tension and
the
Centroid of the group of anchors loaded in tension, mm; ′ is always positive,
appendix d
= Distance between resultant shear load on a group of anchors loaded in shear in the
same
Direction, and the centroid of the group of anchors loaded in shear in the same
direction, mm; is always positive, appendix d
= Load effects of earthquake, or related internal moments and forces, Sec 6.2, 8.3
= Modulus of elasticity of concrete, mpa, see 6.1.7.1, Sec 6.1‐6.3, 6.6, 6.9
Bangladesh National Building Code 2011 6‐3

Part 6
Structural Design

= Modulus of elasticity of beam concrete, mpa, Sec 6.5
= Modulus of elasticity of slab concrete, mpa, Sec 6.5
= Flexural stiffness of compression member,N mm2, see 6.3.10.6, Sec 6.3
= Modulus of elasticity of prestressing steel,mpa, see 6.1.7.3, Sec 6.1
= Modulus of elasticity of reinforcement and structural steel, mpa, see 6.1.7.2, Sec 6.1, 6.3, 6.6
= Specified compressive strength of concrete, mpa, Sec 6.1‐6.4, 6.6, 6.9, 8.2, 8.3, Appendixes A,
D
= Square root of specified compressive strength of concrete, mpa, Sec 6.1, 6.2, 6.4, 6.9, 8.2, 8.3,
Appendix D
= Effective compressive strength of the concrete in a strut or a nodal zone, mpa, Sec 6.8,
Appendix A
= Average splitting tensile strength of lightweight concrete, mpa, See 6.1.8.1 Sec 6.1, 6.4, 8.2.3.4
(d), Sec 8.2
= Stress due to unfactored dead load, at extreme fiber of section where tensile stress is caused
by externally applied loads, mpa, Sec 6.4
= Compressive stress in concrete (after allowance for all prestress losses) at centroid of cross
section resisting externally applied loads or at junction of web and flange when the centroid
lies within the flange, mpa. (In a composite member, is the resultant compressive stress at
centroid of composite section, or at junction of web and flange when the centroid lies within
the flange, due to both prestress and moments resisted by precast member acting alone), Sec
6.4
= Compressive stress in concrete due to effective prestress forces only (after allowance for all
prestress losses) at extreme fiber of section where tensile stress is caused by externally
applied loads, mpa, Sec 6.4
= Stress in prestressing steel at nominal flexural strength, mpa, Sec 8.2
= Specified tensile strength of prestressing steel, mpa, Sec 6.4
= Modulus of rupture of concrete, mpa, see 6.2.5.2.3, Sec 6.2, 6.6
= Calculated tensile stress in reinforcement at service loads, mpa, Sec 6.3
= Stress in compression reinforcement under factored loads, mpa, Appendix A
= Effective stress in prestressing steel (after allowance for all prestress losses), mpa, Sec 8.2,
Appendix A
= Specified tensile strength of anchor steel, mpa, Appendix D
= Specified yield strength of reinforcement, mpa, Sec 6.2‐6.4, 6.6, 6.9, 6.12, 8.1‐8.3, Appendix A
= Specified yield strength of anchor steel, mpa, Appendix D
= Specified yield strength of transverse reinforcement, mpa, Sec 6.3, 6.4, 8.2‐8.3
= Loads due to weight and pressures of fluids with well‐defined densities and controllable
maximum heights, or related internal moments and forces, Sec 6.2
= Nominal strength of a strut, tie, or nodal zone, N, Appendix A
= Nominal strength at face of a nodal zone, N, Appendix A
= Nominal strength of a strut, N, Appendix A
= Nominal strength of a tie, N, Appendix A
= Factored force acting in a strut, tie, bearing area, or nodal zone in a strut‐and‐tie model, N,
Appendix A
= Overall thickness or height of member, mm, Sec 6.2‐6.4, 6.6, 6.11, 6.12, 8.2, 8.3, Appendix A
= Thickness of member in which an anchor is located, measured parallel to anchor axis, mm,
Appendix D
= Cross‐sectional dimension of member core measured to the outside edges of the trans‐
verse reinforcement composing area , mm, Sec 8.3
= Effective embedment depth of anchor, mm, see D.8.5, Appendix D
= Thickness of overhanging portion of the flange of a T‐beam, see 6.3.15.2(b)
= Depth of shearhead cross section, mm, Sec 6.4
= Height of entire wall from base to top or height of the segment of wall considered, mm, Sec
6.4, 8.3
= Maximum center‐to‐center horizontal spacing of crossties or hoop legs on all faces of the
column, mm, Sec 8.3
6‐4 Vol. 2
Chapter 1
= Loads due to weight and pressure of soil, water in soil, or other materials, or related internal
moments and forces, Sec 6.2
= Moment of inertia of section about centroidal axis, mm4, Sec 6.3, 6.4
= Moment of inertia of gross section of beam about centroidal axis, mm4, see 6.5.6.1.6, Sec 6.5
= Moment of inertia of cracked section transformed to concrete, mm4, Sec 6.2
= Effective moment of inertia for computation of deflection, mm4, see 6.2.5.2.3, Sec 6.2
= Moment of inertia of gross concrete section about centroidal axis, neglecting reinforcement,
mm4,Sec 6.2, 6.3, 6.6
= Moment of inertia of gross section of slab about centroidal axis defined for calculating and
, mm4, Sec 6.5
= Moment of inertia of reinforcement about centroidal axis of member cross section, mm4, Sec
6.3
= Moment of inertia of structural steel shape, pipe, or tubing about centroidal axis of composite
member cross section, mm4, Sec 6.3
= Effective length factor for compression members, Sec 6.3, 6.6
= Coefficient for basic concrete breakout strength in tension, Appendix D
= Coefficient for pryout strength, Appendix D
= Transverse reinforcement index, see 8.2.3.3, Sec 8.2
= Span length of beam or one‐way slab; clear projection of cantilever, mm, Sec 6.2
= Additional embedment length beyond centerline of support or point of inflection, mm, Sec 8.2
= Length of compression member in a frame, measured center‐to‐center of the joints in the
frame, mm, Sec 6.3, 6.6
= Development length in tension of deformed bar, deformed wire, plain and deformed welded
wire reinforcement, or pretensioned strand, mm, Sec 6.9, 8.1‐8.3
= Development length in compression of deformed bars and deformed wire, mm, Sec 8.2
= Development length in tension of deformed bar or deformed wire with a standard hook,
measured from critical section to outside end of hook (straight embedment length between
critical section and start of hook [point of tangency] plus inside radius of bend and one bar
diameter), mm, see Sec. 8.2 and 8.3, Sec 8.2, 8.3
= Development length in tension of headed deformed bar, measured from the critical section to
the bearing face of the head, mm, Sec 8.2
= Load bearing length of anchor for shear, mm, see D.6.2.2, Appendix D
= Length of clear span measured face‐to‐face of supports, mm, Sec 6.1‐6.5, 6.10, 8.2.9.3, Sec 8.2,
8.3
= Length, measured from joint face along axis of structural member, over which special
transverse reinforcement must be provided, mm, Sec 8.3
= Span of member under load test, taken as the shorter span for two‐way slab systems, mm.
Span is the smaller of: (a) distance between centers of supports, and (b) clear distance
between supports plus thickness of member. Span for a cantilever shall be taken as twice
the distance from face of support to cantilever end, Sec 6.11
= Unsupported length of compression member, mm, see 6.3.10.1.1, Sec 6.3
= Length of shearhead arm from centroid of concentrated load or reaction, mm, Sec 6.4
= Length of entire wall or length of segment of wall considered in direction of shear force, mm,
Sec 6.4, 6.6, 8.3
= Length of span in direction that moments are being determined, measured center‐to‐center of
supports, mm, Sec 6.5
= Length of span in direction perpendicular to , measured center‐to‐center of supports, mm,
see 6.5.6.2.3 and 6.5.6.2.4, Sec 6.5
= Live loads, or related internal moments and forces, Sec 6.1, 6.2, 6.11, 8.3
= Roof live load, or related internal moments and forces, Sec 6.2
= Maximum moment in member due to service loads at stage deflection is computed, N mm,
Sec 6.2, 6.6
= Factored moment amplified for the effects of member curvature used for design of
compression member, N mm, see 6.3.10.6, Sec 6.3
= Cracking moment, N mm, see 6.2.5.2.3, Sec 6.2, 6.6

Part 6
Structural Design

= Moment causing flexural cracking at section due to externally applied loads, N mm, Sec 6.4
= Factored moment modified to account for effect of axial compression, N mm, see 6.4.2.2.2,
Sec 6.4
= Maximum factored moment at section due to externally applied loads, N mm, Sec 6.4
= Nominal flexural strength at section, N mm, Sec 6.4, 6.6, 8.2, 8.3
= Nominal flexural strength at section without compression steel, see 6.3.15.1(b), and moment
of resistance developed by compression in the overhanging portion of the T‐flange, see
6.3.15.2(b)
= Additional nominal flexural strength at section due to added compression steel and
additional tension steel , see 6.3.15.1(b), and moment of resistance developed by the web
of a T‐beam, see 6.3.15.2(b)
= Nominal flexural strength of column framing into joint, calculated for factored axial force,
consistent with the direction of lateral forces considered, resulting in lowest flexural strength,
N mm, Sec 8.3
= Total factored static moment, N mm, Sec 6.5
= Required plastic moment strength of shearhead cross section, N mm, Sec 6.4
= Probable flexural strength of members, with or without axial load, determined using the
properties of the member at the joint faces assuming a tensile stress in the longitudinal bars of
at least 1.25 and a strength reduction factor, , of 1.0, N mm, Sec 8.3
= Factored moment due to loads causing appreciable sway, N mm, Sec 6.3
= Portion of slab factored moment balanced by support moment, N mm, Sec 8.3
= Factored moment at section, N mm, Sec 6.3‐6.6, 8.3
= Moment at midheight of wall due to factored lateral and eccentric vertical loads, not including
effects, N mm, Sec 6.6
= Moment resistance contributed by shearhead reinforcement, N mm, Sec 6.4
= Smaller factored end moment on a compression member, to be taken as positive if member is
bent in single curvature, and negative if bent in double curvature, N mm, Sec 6.3
= Factored end moment on a compression member at the end at which M1 acts, due to loads
that cause no appreciable sidesway, calculated using a first‐order elastic frame analysis, N mm,
Sec 6.3
, = Minimum value of , N mm, Sec 6.3
= Factored end moment on compression member at the end at which M2 acts, due to loads that
cause no appreciable sidesway, calculated using a first‐order elastic frame analysis, N mm, Sec
6.3
= Factored end moment on compression member at the end at which acts, due to loads that
cause appreciable sidesway, calculated using a first‐order elastic frame analysis, N mm, Sec 6.3
= Number of items, such as strength tests, bars, wires, monostrand anchorage devices, anchors,
or shearhead arms, Sec 6.4, 8.2, Appendix D
= Basic concrete breakout strength in tension of a single anchor in cracked concrete, N, see
D.5.2.2, Appendix D
= Nominal concrete breakout strength in tension of a single anchor, N, see D.5.2.1, Appendix D
= Nominal concrete breakout strength in tension of a group of anchors, N, see D.5.2.1, Appendix
D
= Nominal strength in tension, N, Appendix D
= Pullout strength in tension of a single anchor in cracked concrete, N, see D.5.3.4 and D.5.3.5,
Appendix D
= Nominal pullout strength in tension of a single anchor, N, see D.5.3.1, Appendix D
= Nominal strength of a single anchor or group of anchors in tension as governed by the steel
strength, N, see D.5.1.1 and D.5.1.2, Appendix D
= Side‐face blowout strength of a single anchor, N, Appendix D
= Side‐face blowout strength of a group of anchors, N, Appendix D
= Factored axial force normal to cross section occurring simultaneously with or ; to be taken
as positive for compression and negative for tension, N, Sec 6.4
= Factored tensile force applied to anchor or group of anchors, N, Appendix D
= Factored horizontal tensile force applied at top of bracket or corbel acting simultaneously with
6‐6 Vol. 2
Chapter 1
Vu , to be taken as positive for tension, N, Sec 6.4
= Outside perimeter of concrete cross section, mm, see 6.4.4.1, Sec 6.4
= Perimeter of centerline of outermost closed transverse torsional reinforcement, mm, Sec 6.4
= Nominal axial strength at balanced strain conditions, N, see 6.3.3.2, Sec 6.2, 6.3
= Critical buckling load, N, see 6.3.10.6, Sec 6.3
= Nominal axial strength of cross section, N, Sec 6.2, 6.3, 6.6
, = Maximum allowable value of , N, see 6.3.3.6, Sec 6.3
= Nominal axial strength at zero eccentricity, N, Sec 6.3
= Unfactored axial load at the design (midheight) section including effects of selfweight, N, Sec
6.6
= Factored axial force; to be taken as positive for compression and negative for tension, N, Sec
6.3, 6.6, 8.3
= Factored dead load per unit area, Sec 6.5
= Factored live load per unit area, Sec 6.5
= Factored load per unit area, Sec 6.5
= Stability index for a story, see 6.3.10.5.2, Sec 6.3
= Radius of gyration of cross section of a compression member, mm, Sec 6.3
= Rain load, or related internal moments and forces, Sec 6.2
= Center‐to‐center spacing of items, such as longitudinal reinforcement, transverse
reinforcement, prestressing tendons, wires, or anchors, mm, Sec 6.3, 6.4, 6.9, 6.11, 6.12, 8.2,
8.3, Appendix D
= Center‐to‐center spacing of reinforcement in the i‐th layer adjacent to the surface of the
member, mm, Appendix A
= Center‐to‐center spacing of transverse reinforcement within the length , mm, Sec 8.3
= Sample standard deviation, mpa, Appendix D
= Center‐to‐center spacing of longitudinal shear or torsion reinforcement, mm, Sec 6.4
= Snow load, or related internal moments and forces, Sec 6.2, 8.3
= Moment, shear, or axial force at connection corresponding to development of probable
strength at intended yield locations, based on the governing mechanism of inelastic lateral
deformation, considering both gravity and earthquake load effects, Sec 8.3
= Nominal flexural, shear, or axial strength of connection, Sec 8.3
= Yield strength of connection, based on , for moment, shear, or axial force, Sec 8.3
= Wall thickness of hollow section, mm, Sec 6.4
= Cumulative effect of temperature, creep, shrinkage, differential settlement, and shrinkage‐
compensating concrete, Sec 6.2
= Nominal torsional moment strength, N mm, Sec 6.4
= Factored torsional moment at section, N mm, Sec 6.4
= Required strength to resist factored loads or related internal moments and forces, Sec 6.2
= Nominal shear stress, mpa, see 6.4.10.6.2, Sec 6.4, 8.3
= Basic concrete breakout strength in shear of a single anchor in cracked concrete, N, see D.6.2.2
and D.6.2.3, Appendix D
= Nominal shear strength provided by concrete, N, Sec 6.1, 6.4, 6.5, 8.3
= Nominal concrete breakout strength in shear of a single anchor, N, see D.6.2.1, Appendix D
= Nominal concrete breakout strength in shear of a group of anchors, N, see D.6.2.1, Appendix D
= Nominal shear strength provided by concrete when diagonal cracking results from combined
shear and moment, N, Sec 6.4
= Nominal concrete pryout strength of a single anchor, N, see D.6.3.1, Appendix D
= Nominal concrete pryout strength of a group of anchors, N, see D.6.3.1, Appendix D
= Nominal shear strength provided by concrete when diagonal cracking results from high
principal tensile stress in web, N, Sec 6.4
= Shear force at section due to unfactored dead load, N, Sec 6.4
= Design shear force corresponding to the development of the probable moment strength of the
member, N, Sec 8.3
= Factored shear force at section due to externally applied loads occurring simultaneously with
, N, Sec 8.3
= Nominal shear strength, N, Sec 6.1, 6.3, 6.4, 8.3, Appendix D
= Nominal horizontal shear strength, N, Sec 6.12

Part 6
Structural Design

= Vertical component of effective prestress force at section, N, Sec 6.4
= Nominal shear strength provided by shear reinforcement, N, Sec 6.4
= Nominal strength in shear of a single anchor or group of anchors as governed by the steel
strength, N, see D.6.1.1 and D.6.1.2, Appendix D
= Factored shear force at section, N, Sec 6.4, 6.5, 6.12, 8.2, 8.3
= Factored shear force applied to a single anchor or group of anchors, N, Appendix D
= Factored shear force on the slab critical section for two‐way action due to gravity loads, N, see
Sec. 8.3
= Factored horizontal shear in a story, N, Sec 6.3
= Density (unit weight) of normalweight concrete or equilibrium density of lightweight concrete,
kg/m3, Sec 6.1, 6.2
= Factored load per unit length of beam or oneway slab, Sec 6.1
= Wind load, or related internal moments and forces, Sec 6.2
= Shorter overall dimension of rectangular part of cross section, mm, Sec 6.5
= Longer overall dimension of rectangular part of cross section, mm, Sec 6.5
= Distance from centroidal axis of gross section, neglecting reinforcement, to tension face, mm,
Sec 6.2, 6.4
= Angle defining the orientation of reinforcement, Sec 6.4, 8.3, Appendix A
= Coefficient defining the relative contribution of concrete strength to nominal wall shear
strength, Sec 8.3
= Ratio of flexural stiffness of beam section to flexural stiffness of a width of slab bounded
laterally by centerlines of adjacent panels (if any) on each side of the beam, see 6.5.6.1.6, Sec
6.2, 6.5
= Average value of for all beams on edges of a panel, Sec 6.2
= in direction of l1, Sec 6.5
= in direction of , Sec 6.5
= Angle between the axis of a strut and the bars in the i‐th layer of reinforcement crossing that
strut, Appendix A
= Constant used to compute in slabs and footings, Sec 6.4
= Ratio of flexural stiffness of shearhead arm to that of the surrounding composite slab section,
see 6.4.10.4.5, Sec 6.4
= Ratio of long to short dimensions: clear spans for two‐way slabs, see 6.2.5.3.3; sides of column,
concentrated load or reaction area, see 6.4.10.2.1; or sides of a footing, see 6.8.4.4.2, Sec 6.2,
6.4, 6.8
= Ratio of area of reinforcement cut off to total area of tension reinforcement at section, Sec 8.2
= Ratio used to account for reduction of stiffness of columns due to sustained axial loads, see
6.3.10.6.2, Sec 6.3
= Ratio used to account for reduction of stiffness of columns due to sustained lateral loads, see
6.3.10.4.2, Sec 6.3
= Factor to account for the effect of the anchorage of ties on the effective compressive strength
of a nodal zone, Appendix A
= Factor used to compute in prestressed slabs, Sec 6.4
= Factor to account for the effect of cracking and confining reinforcement on the effective
compressive strength of the concrete in a strut, Appendix A
= Ratio of torsional stiffness of edge beam section to flexural stiffness of a width of slab equal to
span length of beam, center‐to‐center of supports, see 6.5.6.4.2, Sec 6.5
= Factor relating depth of equivalent rectangular compressive stress block to neutral axis depth,
see 6.3.2.7.3, Sec 6.3
= Factor used to determine the unbalanced moment transferred by flexure at slab‐column
connections, see 6.5.5.3.2, Sec 6.4, 6.5, 8.3
= Factor used to determine the portion of reinforcement located in center band of footing, see
6.8.4.4.2, Sec 6.8
= Factor used to determine the unbalanced moment transferred by eccentricity of shear at slab‐
column connections, see 6.4.10.7.1, Sec 6.4
6‐8 Vol. 2
Chapter 1
= Moment magnification factor to reflect effects of member curvature between ends of
compression member, Sec 6.3
= Moment magnification factor for frames not braced against sidesway, to reflect lateral drift
resulting from lateral and gravity loads, Sec 6.3
= Design displacement, mm, Sec 8.3
= Computed, out‐of‐plane deflection at midheight of wall corresponding to crackingmoment,
, mm, Sec 6.6
= Increase in stress in prestressing steel due to factored loads, mpa, Appendix A
= Computed, out‐of‐plane deflection at midheight of wall corresponding to nominal flexural
strength, , mm, Sec 6.6
= Relative lateral deflection between the top and bottom of a story due to lateral forces
computed using a first‐order elastic frame analysis and stiffness values satisfying 6.3.10.5.2,
mm, Sec 6.3
= Difference between initial and final (after load removal) deflections for load test or repeat load
test, mm, Sec 6.11
= Computed, out‐of‐plane deflection at midheight of wall due to service loads, mm, Sec 6.6
= Computed deflection at midheight of wall due to factored loads, mm, Sec 6.6
= Measured maximum deflection during first load test, mm, see 6.11.5.2, Sec 6.11
= Maximum deflection measured during second load test relative to the position of the structure
at the beginning of second load test, mm, see 6.11.5.2, Sec 6.11
= Net tensile strain in extreme layer of longitudinal tension steel at nominal strength, excluding
strains due to effective prestress, creep, shrinkage, and temperature, Sec 6.1‐6.3
= Angle between axis of strut, compression diagonal, or compression field and the tension chord
of the member, Sec 6.4, Appendix A
= Modification factor reflecting the reduced mechanical properties of lightweight concrete, all
relative to normalweight concrete of the same compressive strength, see 6.1.8.1, 6.4.5.4.3,
8.2.3.4(d), 8.2.6.2, 8.2.10.2(b), Sec 6.2, 6.4, 6.9, 8.2, 8.3 and Appendixes A, D
= Multiplier for additional deflection due to long‐term effects, see 6.2.5.2.5, Sec 6.2
= Coefficient of friction, see 6.4.5.4.3, Sec 6.4, 8.3
= Time‐dependent factor for sustained load, see 6.2.5.2.5, Sec 6.2
= Ratio of to , Sec 6.4, 6.5, 8.3
= Ratio of to , see 6.3.15.1(b), Sec 6.2

= Ratio of to producing balanced strain conditions, see 6.3.3.2, Sec 6.3, 6.5, 6.6
= Ratio of to , see 6.3.15.2(b)
= Ratio of area of distributed longitudinal reinforcement to gross concrete area perpendicular to
that reinforcement, Sec 6.4, 6.6, 8.3
= Maximum reinforcement ratio allowed for beams corresponding to 0.004 , see
6.3.15.1(a)
= Ratio of volume of spiral reinforcement to total volume of core confined by the spiral
(measured out‐to‐out of spirals), Sec 6.3, 8.3
= Ratio of area distributed transverse reinforcement to gross concrete area perpendicular to
that reinforcement, Sec 6.4, 6.6, 8.3
= Ratio of tie reinforcement area to area of contact surface, see 6.12.5.3.3, Sec 6.12
= Ratio of to , see 6.3.15.2(b), Sec 6.4
= Strength reduction factor, see 6.2.3, Sec 6.1‐6.6, 6.9, 6.11, 6.12, 8.3, Appendixes A & D
, = Factor used to modify tensile strength of anchors based on presence or absence of cracks in
concrete, see D.5.2.6, Appendix D
, = Factor used to modify pullout strength of anchors based on presence or absence of cracks in
concrete, see D.5.3.6, Appendix D
, = Factor used to modify shear strength of anchors based on presence or absence of cracks in
concrete and presence or absence of supplementary reinforcement, see D.6.2.7 for anchors in
shear, Appendix D
, = Factor used to modify tensile strength of postinstalled anchors intended for use in uncracked
concrete without supplementary reinforcement, see D.5.2.7, Appendix D
= Factor used to modify development length based on reinforcement coating, Sec 8.2
, = Factor used to modify tensile strength of anchors based on eccentricity of applied loads, see

Part 6
Structural Design

D.5.2.4, Appendix D
, = Factor used to modify shear strength of anchors based on eccentricity of applied loads, see
D.6.2.5, Appendix D
, = Factor used to modify tensile strength of anchors based on proximity to edges of concrete
member, see D.5.2.5, Appendix D
, = Factor used to modify shear strength of anchors based on proximity to edges of concrete
member, see D.6.2.6, Appendix D
, = Factor used to modify shear strength of anchors located in concrete members with
1.5 , see D.6.2.8, Appendix D
= Factor used to modify development length based on reinforcement size, Sec 8.2
= Factor used to modify development length based on reinforcement location, Sec 8.2
= Factor used to modify development length for welded deformed wire reinforcement in
tension, Sec 8.2
= Effective tension area of concrete surrounding the flexural tension reinforcement and having
the same centroid as that of the reinforcement, divided by the number of bars. When the
flexural reinforcement consists of different bar sizes the number of bars or wires shall be
computed as the total area of reinforcement divided by the area of the largest bar used

= Area of skin reinforcement per unit height in a side face
= Factor relating shear and torsional stress properties =
∑
= Thickness of concrete cover measured from extreme tension fibre to centre of bar or wire
located closest thereto
= Moment of resistance of a section without compression steel
= Additional moment of resistance due to added compression steel and additional tension
steel as2
= Spacing of shear or torsion reinforcement in direction parallel to longitudinal reinforcement
= Torsional moment strength provided by concrete
= Torsional moment strength provided by torsion reinforcement
= Shorter centre to centre dimension of closed rectangular stirrup
= Longer centre to centre dimension of closed rectangular stirrup
= Quantity limiting distribution of flexural reinforcement, see Eq (6.2.35)
= Coefficient equal to 2 ⁄ ⁄3 but not more than 1.5
1
= Factor defined in 6.2.3.7
= Time‐dependent factor for sustained load
= Minimum ratio of tension reinforcement

6.1.2 General
6.1.2.1 Members shall be designed for adequate strength in accordance with the provisions
of this chapter, using load factors specified in 2.6.5.1 and strength reduction factors
in 6.2.3.1.
6.1.2.2 Design of reinforced concrete members using Working Stress Design method
(Appendix B) is also permitted.
6‐10 Vol. 2
Chapter 1
6.1.2.3 Structures and structural members shall be designed to have design strength at all
sections at least equal to the required strength (U) calculated for the factored loads
and forces in such combinations as are stipulated in Chapter 2, Loads. The nominal
strength provided for the section multiplied by the strength reduction factor shall
be equal to or greater than the calculated required strength U.
6.1.2.4 Members shall also meet all the other requirements of this Code to ensure adequate
performance at service loads.
6.1.2.5 Design strength of reinforcement represented by the values of and used in
design calculations shall not exceed 550 MPa, except for prestressing steel and for
transverse reinforcement in 6.3.9.3 and Sec. 8.3. or may exceed 420 MPa, only
if the ratio of the actual tensile strength to the actual yield strength is not less than
1.20, and the elongation percentage is not less than 16.
6.1.2.6 For structural concrete, shall not be less than 17 MPa. No maximum value of

shall apply unless restricted by a specific Code provision.
6.1.3 Loading
6.1.3.1 Loads and their combinations shall be in accordance with the requirements specified
in Chapter 2, Loads.
6.1.3.2 Structures shall be designed to resist all applicable loads.
6.1.3.3 Effects of forces due to prestressing, crane loads, vibration, impact, shrinkage,
temperature changes, creep, expansion of shrinkage‐compensating concrete, and
unequal settlement of supports shall be duly considered.
6.1.4 Methods of analysis
6.1.4.1 Members of frames or continuous construction (beams or one‐way slabs) shall be
designed for the maximum effects of factored loads as determined by the theory of
elastic analysis, except as modified for redistribution of moments in continuous
flexural members according to 6.1.5. Design is permitted to be simplified by using the
assumptions specified in 6.1.6 & 6.1.9 through 6.1.12.
6.1.4.2 Frame analysis by approximate methods shall be permitted for buildings of usual
types of construction, spans, and story heights.
6.1.4.3 Provided (a) through (e) below are satisfied, the approximate moments and shears
given here shall be permitted for design of continuous beams and one‐way slabs
(slabs reinforced to resist flexural stresses in only one direction), as an alternate to
frame analysis:
a) There are two or more spans;
b) Spans are approximately equal, with the larger of two adjacent spans not greater than
the shorter by more than 20 percent;
c) Loads are uniformly distributed;
d) Unfactored live load, , does not exceed three times unfactored dead load, ; and
e) Members are prismatic.
For calculating negative moments, is taken as the average of the adjacent clear span lengths.
Positive moment
End spans

Part 6
Structural Design

Discontinuous end unrestrained ⁄11
Discontinuous end integral with support ⁄14
Interior spans ⁄16

Negative moments at exterior face of first interior support
Two spans ⁄9
More than two spans ⁄10

Negative moment at other faces of interior
⁄11
Supports

Negative moment at face of all supports for

Slabs with spans not exceeding 3.048 m;
and beams where ratio of sum of column stiffnesses to beam stiffness exceeds 8
at each end of the span ⁄12
Negative moment at interior face of exterior support for members built integrally with
supports
Where support is spandrel beam ⁄24
Where support is a column ⁄16

Shear in end members at face of first
1.15 ⁄2
interior support
Shear at face of all other supports ⁄2
6.1.4.4 Strut‐and‐tie models, provided in Appendix A, shall be permitted to be used in the design of
structural concrete.
6.1.5 Redistribution of moments in continuous flexural members
6.1.5.1 It shall be permitted to decrease factored moments calculated by elastic theory at sections of
maximum negative or maximum positive moment in any span of continuous flexural members
for any assumed loading arrangement by not more than 1000 percent, with a maximum of
20 percent, except where approximate values for moments are used.
6.1.5.2 Redistribution of moments shall be made only when is equal to or greater than 0.0075 at

the section at which moment is reduced.
6‐12 Vol. 2
Chapter 1
6.1.5.3 At all other sections within the spans, the reduced moment shall be used for calculating
redistributed moments. Static equilibrium shall have to be maintained after redistribution of
moments for each loading arrangement.
6.1.6 Span length
6.1.6.1 The span length of a simply supported beam shall be taken as the smaller of the distance
between the centres of bearings, or the clear distance between supports plus the effective
depth.
6.1.6.2 For determination of moments in analysis of frames or continuous construction, span length
shall be taken as the distance center‐to‐center of supports.
6.1.6.3 Design on the basis of moments at faces of support shall be permitted for beams built
integrally with supports.
6.1.6.4 It shall be permitted to analyze solid or ribbed slabs built integrally with supports, with clear
spans not more than 3 m, as continuous slabs on knife edge supports with spans equal to the
clear spans of the slab and width of beams otherwise neglected.
6.1.7 Modulus of elasticity
6.1.7.1 Modulus of elasticity, , for concrete shall be permitted to be taken as . 0.043 (in

MPa) for values of between 1440 and 2560 kg/m3. For normalweight concrete, shall be
permitted to be taken as 4700 .
6.1.7.2 Modulus of elasticity, , for reinforcement shall be permitted to be taken as 200,000 MPa.

Part 6
Structural Design

6.1.8 Lightweight concrete
6.1.8.1 To account for the use of lightweight concrete, unless specifically noted otherwise, a
modification factor λ appears as a multiplier of in all applicable equations and sections of
this Code, where 0.85 for sand‐lightweight concrete and 0.75 for all‐lightweight
concrete. Linear interpolation between 0.75 and 0.85 shall be permitted, on the basis of
volumetric fractions, when a portion of the lightweight fine aggregate is replaced with
normalweight fine aggregate. Linear interpolation between 0.85 and 1.0 shall be permitted,
on the basis of volumetric fractions, for concrete containing normalweight fine aggregate and
a blend of lightweight and normalweight coarse aggregates. For normalweight concrete,
1.0. If average splitting tensile strength of lightweight concrete, , is specified,
/ 0.56 1.0.
6.1.9 Stiffness
6.1.9.1 For computing relative flexural and torsional stiffnesses of columns, walls, floors, and roof
systems, use of any set of reasonable assumptions shall be permitted. The assumptions
adopted shall be consistent throughout analysis.
6.1.9.2 Both in determining moments and in design of members, effect of haunches shall be
considered.
6.1.10 Effective stiffness for determining lateral deflections
6.1.10.1 Lateral deflections resulting from service lateral loads for reinforced concrete building systems
shall be computed by either a linear analysis with member stiffness determined using 1.4
times the flexural stiffness defined in 6.1.10.2 and 6.1.10.3 or by a more detailed analysis.
Member properties shall not be taken greater than the gross section properties.
6.1.10.2 Lateral deflections resulting from factored lateral loads for reinforced concrete building
systems shall be computed either by linear analysis with member stiffness defined by (a) or
(b), or by a more detailed analysis considering the reduced stiffness of all members under the
loading conditions:
a) By section properties defined in 6.3.10.4.1(a) through (c); or
b) 50 percent of stiffness values based on gross section properties.
6.1.10.3 Lateral deflections resulting from factored lateral loads shall be permitted to be computed by
using linear analysis, where two‐way slabs without beams are designated as part of the
seismic‐force‐resisting system. The stiffness of slab members shall be defined by a model that
is in substantial agreement with results of comprehensive tests and analysis and the stiffness
of other frame members shall be as defined in 6.1.10.2.
6.1.11 Considerations for Columns
6.1.11.1 Columns shall be designed to resist the axial forces from factored loads on all floors or roof
and the maximum moment from factored loads on a single adjacent span of the floor or roof
under consideration. Loading condition resulting the maximum ratio of moment to axial load
shall also be considered.
6.1.11.2 In frames or continuous construction, consideration shall be given to the effect of unbalanced
floor or roof loads on both exterior and interior columns and of eccentric loading due to other
causes.
6‐14 Vol. 2
Chapter 1
6.1.11.3 It shall be permitted to assume far ends of columns built integrally with the structure to be
fixed, while computing gravity load moments in columns.
6.1.11.4 Resistance to moments at any floor or roof level shall be provided by distributing the moment
between columns immediately above and below the given floor in proportion to the relative
column stiffnesses and conditions of restraint.
6.1.12 Live load arrangement
6.1.12.1 The following shall be permitted to assume:
a) The live load is applied only to the floor or roof under consideration; and
b) The far ends of columns built integrally with the structure are considered to be fixed.
6.1.12.2 Arrangement of live load shall be permitted to be assumed to be limited to combinations of:
a) Factored dead load on all spans with full factored live load on two adjacent spans; and
b) Factored dead load on all spans with full factored live load on alternate spans.
6.1.13 Construction of Tbeam
6.1.13.1 In the construction of T‐beam, the flange and web shall be built integrally or otherwise
effectively bonded together.
6.1.13.2 Width of slab effective as a T‐beam flange shall not exceed one‐quarter of the span length of
the beam, and the effective overhanging flange width on each side of the web shall not
exceed:
a) Eight times the slab thickness; and
b) One‐half the clear distance to the next web.
6.1.13.3 The effective overhanging flange width for beams with a slab on one side only shall not
exceed:
a) One‐twelfth the span length of the beam;
b) Six times the slab thickness; and
c) One‐half the clear distance to the next web.
6.1.13.4 Isolated beams, in which the T‐shape is used to provide a flange for additional compression
area, shall have a flange thickness not less than one‐half the width of web and an effective
flange width not more than four times the width of web.
6.1.13.5 When primary flexural reinforcement in a slab that is considered as a T‐beam flange
(excluding joist construction) is parallel to the beam, reinforcement shall be provided in the
top of the slab in the direction perpendicular to the beam and in accordance with the
following:
6.1.13.5.1 Transverse reinforcement shall be designed to carry the factored load on the overhanging
slab width assumed to act as a cantilever. For isolated beams, the full width of overhanging
flange shall be considered. For other T‐beams, only the effective overhanging slab width need
be considered.
6.1.13.5.2 Spacing of transverse reinforcement shall be not farther apart than five times the slab
thickness, nor farther apart than 450 mm.
6.1.14 Construction of joist
6.1.14.1 Construction of joist consists of a monolithic combination of regularly spaced ribs and a top
slab arranged to span in one direction or two orthogonal directions.

Part 6
Structural Design

6.1.14.2 Width of ribs shall not be less than 100 mm, and the ribs shall have a depth of not more than
3‐1/2 times the minimum width of rib.
6.1.14.3 Clear spacing between ribs shall not exceed 750 mm.
6.1.14.4 Joist construction not meeting the limitations of 6.1.14.1 through 6.1.14.3 shall be designed as
slabs and beams.
6.1.14.5 When permanent burned clay or concrete tile fillers of material having a unit compressive
strength at least equal to in the joists are used:
6.1.14.5.1 For shear and negative moment strength computations, the vertical shells of fillers in contact
with the ribs shall be permitted to include. Other portions of fillers shall not be included in
strength computations.
6.1.14.5.2 Slab thickness over permanent fillers shall be not less than one‐twelfth the clear distance
between ribs, nor less than 40 mm.
6.1.14.5.3 Reinforcement normal to the ribs shall be provided in the slab in one‐way joists, as required
by 8.1.11
6.1.14.6 When removable forms or fillers are used, which do not comply with 6.1.14.5, then:
6.1.14.6.1 Slab thickness shall be not less than one‐twelfth the clear distance between ribs, nor less than
50 mm.
6.1.14.6.2 Reinforcement normal to the ribs shall be provided in the slab as required for flexure,
considering load concentrations, if any, but not less than required by 8.1.11
6.1.14.7 Where conduits or pipes as permitted by relevant provisions of embedments in concrete are
embedded within the slab, slab thickness shall be at least 25 mm greater than the total overall
depth of the conduits or pipes at any point. Conduits or pipes shall not impair significantly the
strength of the construction.
6.1.14.8 For joist construction, shall be permitted to be 10 percent more than that specified in Sec

6.4.
6.1.15 Separate floor finish
6.1.15.1 Unless placed monolithically with the floor slab or designed in accordance with requirements
of Sec. 6.12, floor finish shall not be included as part of a structural member.
6.1.15.2 All concrete floor finishes shall be permitted to be considered as part of required cover or
total thickness for nonstructural considerations.
6.2 STRENGTH AND SERVICEABILITY REQUIREMENTS
6.2.1 General
6.2.1.1 Structures and structural members shall be designed to have design strengths at all sections
at least equal to the required strengths calculated for the factored loads and forces in such
combinations as are stipulated in this Code.
6‐16 Vol. 2
Chapter 1
6.2.1.2 Members also shall meet all other requirements of this Code to ensure adequate performance
at service load levels.
6.2.2 Required strength
6.2.2.1 Required strength shall be at least equal to the effects of factored loads in such

combinations as are stipulated in Chapter 2, Loads.
6.2.2.2 If resistance to impact effects is taken into account in design, such effects shall be included
with .
6.2.2.3 Estimations of differential settlement, creep, shrinkage, expansion of shrinkage‐compensating
concrete, or temperature change shall be based on a realistic assessment of such effects
occurring in service.
6.2.3 Design Strength
6.2.3.1 Design strength provided by a member, and its connections to other members, in terms of
flexure, axial load, shear, and torsion, shall be taken as the nominal strength calculated in
accordance with the requirements and assumptions of this chapter, multiplied by a strength
reduction factors as stipulated in 6.2.3.2, 6.2.3.3, and 6.2.3.4.
6.2.3.2 Strength reduction factor shall be as given in 6.2.3.2.1 through 6.2.3.2.6:
6.2.3.2.1 Tension‐controlled sections as defined in 6.3.3.4 ............................................... 0.90
6.2.3.2.2 Compression‐controlled sections, as defined in 6.3.3.3:
Members with spiral reinforcement conforming to 6.3.9.3........................ 0.75
Other reinforced members .......................................................................... 0.65
For sections in which the net tensile strain in the extreme tension steel at nominal strength, , is between
the limits for compression‐controlled and tension‐controlled sections, shall be permitted to be linearly
increased from that for compression‐controlled sections to 0.90 as increases from the compression
controlled strain limit to 0.005 (Also see Fig. 6.2.3.1). While interpolating, it shall be permitted to round φ
to second digit after decimal.

Fig. 6.2.3.1‐Variation of φ with net tensile strain in extreme tension steel, ε and
⁄ for Grade 420 reinforcement and for prestressing steel (see sec.6.2.3.2.2)

Part 6
Structural Design

6.2.3.2.3 It shall be permitted for compression‐controlled sections, as defined in 6.3.3.3, the following
optional, more conservative alternative values of strength reduction factor , where less
controlled construction environment justifies such selection according to engineering
judgment of the designer:
Members with spiral reinforcement conforming to 6.3.9.3 0.70
Other reinforced members 0.60
For sections in which the net tensile strain in the extreme tension steel at nominal strength, , is between
the limits for compression‐controlled and tension‐controlled sections, shall be permitted to be linearly
increased from that for compression‐controlled sections to 0.90 as increases from the compression
controlled strain limit to 0.005 (Also see Fig. 6.2.3.2). While interpolating, it shall be permitted to round
to second digit after decimal.
Fig. 6.2.3.2‐Variation of φ with net tensile strain in extreme tension steel, and ⁄ for Grade 420
reinforcement and for prestressing steel with reduced values of φ (0.6 and 0.7) for compression
controlled sections (see sec.6.2.3.2.3, Optional application in case of less controlled
environment as per engineering judgment)
6.2.3.2.4 Shear and torsion 0.75
6.2.3.2.5 Bearing on concrete (except for post‐tensioned anchorage zones and strut‐and‐tie models:
0.65
6.2.3.2.6 Strut‐and‐tie models (Appendix A), and struts, ties, nodal zones, and bearing areas in such
models: 0.75
6.2.3.2.7 Calculation of development length specified in Sec 8.2 does not require a strength reduction

factor φ.
6.2.3.3 For structures relying on intermediate precast structural walls in Seismic Design Category D,
special moment frames, or special structural walls to resist earthquake effects, , shall be
modified as given in (a) through (c):
a) For any structural member that is designed to resist , if the nominal shear strength of
the member is less than the shear corresponding to the development of the nominal
flexural strength of the member, for shear shall be 0.60. The nominal flexural strength
shall be determined considering the most critical factored axial loads and including ;
6‐18 Vol. 2
Chapter 1
b) For diaphragms, for shear shall not exceed the minimum for shear used for the

vertical components of the primary seismic‐force‐resisting system;
c) For joints and diagonally reinforced coupling beams, for shear shall be 0.85.
6.2.3.4 Strength reduction factor shall be 0.60 for flexure, compression, shear, and bearing of

structural plain concrete.
6.2.4 Design strength for reinforcement
The values of and used in design calculations shall not exceed 550 MPa, except for transverse
reinforcement in 6.3.9.3 and Sec. 8.3.
6.2.5 Control of deflections
6.2.5.1 Reinforced concrete members subjected to flexure shall be designed to have adequate
stiffness to limit deflections or any deformations that may adversely affect strength or
serviceability of a structure.
6.2.5.2 One‐way construction (nonprestressed)
6.2.5.2.1 Minimum thickness stipulated in Table 6.2.5.1 shall apply for one‐way construction not
supporting or attached to partitions or other construction likely to be damaged by large
deflections, unless computation of deflection indicates a lesser thickness can be used without
adverse effects.
6.2.5.2.2 Where deflections are to be computed, deflections that occur immediately on application of
load shall be computed by usual methods or formulas for elastic deflections, considering
effects of cracking and reinforcement on member stiffness.
TABLE 6.2.5.1 — MINIMUM THICKNESS OF NONPRESTRESSED BEAMS OR ONE‐WAY SLABS UNLESS
DEFLECTIONS ARE CALCULATED
Minimum thickness,
Simply supported One end Both ends Cantilever

continuous continuous
Members not supporting or attached to partitions or other construction likely to be
Member damaged by large deflections
Solid one‐ way /20 /24 /28 /10
slabs
Beams or ribbed
one‐ way slabs /16 /18.5 /21 /8
Notes:
Values given shall be used directly for members with normalweight concrete and Grade 420
reinforcement. For other conditions, the values shall be modified as follows:
a) For lightweight concrete having equilibrium density, , in the range of 1440 to 1840 kg/m3, the
values shall be multiplied by 1.65 – 0.0003 but not less than 1.09.
b) For other than 420 MPa, the values shall be multiplied by 0.4 /700 .
6.2.5.2.3 If not stiffness values are obtained by a more comprehensive analysis, immediate deflection
shall be computed with the modulus of elasticity for concrete, , as specified in 6.1.7.1
(normal weight or lightweight concrete) and with the effective moment of inertia, , as
follows, but not greater than
1 6.2.1

Part 6
Structural Design

where
6.2.2
and
0.62λ 6.2.3
6.2.5.2.4 shall be permitted to be taken for continuous members as the average of values obtained
from Eq. (6.2.1) for the critical positive and negative moment sections. For prismatic
members, shall be permitted to be taken as the value obtained from Eq. (6.2.1) at midspan
for simple and continuous spans, and at support for cantilevers.
6.2.5.2.5 If the values are not obtained by a more comprehensive analysis, additional long‐term
deflection resulting from creep and shrinkage of flexural members (normalweight or
lightweight concrete) shall be determined by multiplying the immediate deflection caused by
the sustained load considered, by the factor
6.2.4
where shall be the value at midspan for simple and continuous spans, and at support for
cantilevers. It shall be permitted to assume , the time‐dependent factor for sustained loads,
to be equal to:
5 years or more 2.0
12 months 1.4
6 months 1.2
3 months 1.0
6.2.5.2.6 The value of deflection computed in accordance with 6.2.5.2.2 through 6.2.5.2.5 shall not
exceed limits stipulated in Table 6.2.5.2.
6.2.5.3 Two‐way construction (nonprestressed)
6.2.5.3.1 The minimum thickness of slabs or other two‐way construction designed in accordance with
the provisions of Sec. 6.5 and conforming with the requirements of 6.5.6.1.2 shall be governed
by Section 6.2.5.3. The thickness of slabs without interior beams spanning between the
supports on all sides shall satisfy the requirements of 6.2.5.3.2 or 6.2.5.3.4. The thickness of
slabs with beams spanning between the supports on all sides shall satisfy requirements of
6.2.5.3.3 or 6.2.5.3.4.
6.2.5.3.2 If slabs are without interior beams spanning between the supports and have a ratio of long to
short span not greater than 2, the minimum thickness shall be in accordance with the
provisions of Table 6.2.5.3 and shall not be less than the following values:
Slabs without drop panels as defined in 6.5.2.5 125 mm;
Slabs with drop panels as defined in 6.5.2.5 100 mm.
TABLE 6.2.5.2 — MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE COMPUTED DEFLECTIONS
Type of member Deflection to be considered Deflection

Flat roofs not supporting or attached to Immediate deflection due to live load /180
nonstructural elements likely to be damaged
by large deflections
6‐20 Vol. 2
Chapter 1
Floors not supporting or attached to Immediate deflection due to live load /360

nonstructural elements likely to be damaged
by large deflections
‡
Roof or floor construction supporting or That part of the total deflection /480
attached to nonstructural elements likely to occurring after attachment of
be damaged by large deflections nonstructural elements (sum of the
long‐term deflection due to all
sustained loads and the immediate
Roof or floor construction supporting or deflection due to any additional live l /240§
attached to nonstructural elements not likely load)†
to be damaged by large deflections
*Limit not intended to safeguard against ponding. Ponding should be checked by suitable calculations
of deflection, including added deflections due to ponded water, and considering long‐term effects of all
sustained loads, camber, construction tolerances, and reliability of provisions for drainage.
†Long‐term deflection shall be determined in accordance with 6.2.5.2.5, but may be reduced by amount
of deflection calculated to occur before attachment of nonstructural elements. This amount shall be
determined on basis of accepted engineering data relating to time‐deflection characteristics of
members similar to those being considered.
‡Limit may be exceeded if adequate measures are taken to prevent damage to supported or attached
elements.
§Limit shall not be greater than tolerance provided for nonstructural elements. Limit may be exceeded
TABLE 6.2.5.3—MINIMUM THICKNESS OF SLABS WITHOUT INTERIOR BEAMS*
Without drop panels‡ With drop panels‡

Exterior panels Interior Exterior panels Interior
, MPa† l l
Without With edge Without With edge
edge beams beams§ edge beams beams§
280 /33 /36 /36 /36 /40 /40
420 /30 /33 /33 /33 /36 /36
520 /28 /31 /31 /31 /34 /34
*For two‐way construction, is the length of clear span in the long direction,
measured face‐to‐face of supports in slabs without beams and face‐to‐face of beams or
other supports in other cases.
†For between the values given in the table, minimum thickness shall be
determined by linear interpolation.
‡Drop panels as defined in 6.5.2.5.
§Slabs with beams between columns along exterior edges. The value of for the edge
beam shall not be less than 0.8.
6.2.5.3.3 The minimum thickness, for slabs with beams spanning between the supports on all sides,

shall be as follows:
a) For equal to or less than 0.2, the provisions of 6.2.5.3.2 shall apply;
b) For greater than 0.2 but not greater than 2.0, shall not be less than
ℓ .
(6.2.5)
.

Part 6
Structural Design

and not less than 125 mm;
c) For greater than 2.0, shall not be less than
ℓ .
6.2.6
and not less than 90 mm;
d) An edge beam with a stiffness ratio not less than 0.80 shall be provided at
discontinuous edges, or the minimum thickness required by Eq. (6.2.5) or (6.2.6) shall be
increased by at least 10 percent in the panel with a discontinuous edge.
Term in (b) and (c) is length of clear span in long direction measured face‐to‐face of beams.
Term in (b) and (c) is ratio of clear spans in long to short direction of slab.
6.2.5.3.4 When computed deflections do not exceed the limits of Table 6.2.5.2, slab thickness less than
the minimum required by 6.2.5.3.1, 6.2.5.3.2, and 6.2.5.3.3 shall be permitted. Deflections
shall be computed taking into account size and shape of the panel, conditions of support, and
nature of restraints at the panel edges. The modulus of elasticity of concrete, , shall be as
specified in 6.1.7.1. The effective moment of inertia, , shall be that given by Eq. (6.2.1);
other values shall be permitted to be used if they result in computed deflections in reasonable
agreement with results of comprehensive tests. Additional long‐term deflection shall be
computed in accordance with 6.2.5.2.5.
6.2.5.4 Composite construction
6.2.5.4.1 Shored construction
Where composite flexural members are supported during construction so that, after removal of
temporary supports, dead load is resisted by the full composite section, it shall be permitted to consider
the composite member equivalent to a monolithically cast member for computation of deflection. For
nonprestressed members, the portion of the member in compression shall determine whether values in
Table 6.2.5.1 for normalweight or lightweight concrete shall apply. If deflection is computed, account shall
be taken of curvatures resulting from differential shrinkage of precast and cast‐in‐place components, and
of axial creep effects in a prestressed concrete member.
6.2.5.4.2 Unshored construction
When the thickness of a nonprestressed precast flexural member meets the requirements of Table
6.2.5.1, deflection need not be computed. If the thickness of a nonprestressed composite member meets
the requirements of Table 6.2.5.1, it is not required to compute deflection occurring after the member
becomes composite, but the long‐term deflection of the precast member shall be investigated for
magnitude and duration of load prior to beginning of effective composite action.
6.2.5.4.3 The computed deflection in accordance with 6.2.5.4.1 or 6.2.5.4.2 shall not exceed limits
stipulated in Table 6.2.5.2.
6.3 AXIAL LOADS AND FLEXURE
6.3.1 Scope
The provisions of Sec. 6.3 shall be applicable to the design of members subject to flexure or axial loads or
a combination thereof.
6‐22 Vol. 2
Chapter 1
6.3.2 Design assumptions
6.3.2.1 The assumptions given in 6.3.2.2 through 6.3.2.7, and satisfaction of applicable conditions of
equilibrium and compatibility of strains shall form the basis of strength design of members for
flexure and axial loads.
6.3.2.2 It shall be assumed that strain in reinforcement and concrete is directly proportional to the
distance from the neutral axis, except that, for deep beams as defined in 6.3.7.1, an analysis
that considers a nonlinear distribution of strain shall be used. Alternatively, it shall be
permitted to use a strut‐and‐tie model. See 6.3.7, 6.4.6, and Appendix A.
6.3.2.3 It shall be assumed that the maximum usable strain at extreme concrete compression fiber is
equal to 0.003.
6.3.2.4 For stress in reinforcement below , it shall be taken as times steel strain. For strains
greater than that corresponding to , stress in reinforcement shall be considered
independent of strain and equal to .
6.3.2.5 In axial and flexural calculations of reinforced concrete, the tensile strength of concrete shall
be neglected.
6.3.2.6 The relationship between concrete compressive stress distribution and concrete strain shall
be assumed to be rectangular, trapezoidal, parabolic, or any other shape that results in
prediction of strength in substantial agreement with results of comprehensive tests.
6.3.2.7 An equivalent rectangular concrete stress distribution defined by 6.3.2.7.1 through 6.3.2.7.3
below shall satisfy the requirements of 6.3.2.6.
6.3.2.7.1 Concrete stress of 0.85 shall be assumed uniformly distributed over an equivalent
compression zone bounded by edges of the cross section and a straight line located parallel to
the neutral axis at a distance from the fiber of maximum compressive strain.
6.3.2.7.2 Distance from the fiber of maximum strain to the neutral axis, , shall be measured in a
direction perpendicular to the neutral axis.
6.3.2.7.3 For between 17 and 28 MPa, shall be taken as 0.85. For above 28 MPa, shall be

reduced linearly at a rate of 0.05 for each 7 MPa of strength in excess of 28 MPa, but shall
not be taken less than 0.65. For between 28 and 56 MPa, may be calculated from Eq.
(6.3.1).
0.85 0.007143 28 0.65 0.85 6.3.1

Part 6
Structural Design

6.3.3 General principles and requirements
6.3.3.1 Stress and strain compatibility using assumptions in 6.3.2 shall be the basis for design of cross
sections subject to flexure or axial loads, or a combination thereof.
6.3.3.2 A cross section shall be considered to be in balanced strain conditions when the tension
reinforcement reaches the strain corresponding to just as concrete in compression reaches
its assumed ultimate strain of 0.003.
6.3.3.3 Sections are compression‐controlled if the net tensile strain in the extreme tension steel, , is

equal to or less than the compression‐controlled strain limit when the concrete in
compression reaches its assumed strain limit of 0.003 (Fig.6.3.3.1). The compression‐
controlled strain limit is the net tensile strain in the reinforcement at balanced strain
conditions. For Grade 420 reinforcement, it shall be permitted to set the compression‐
controlled strain limit equal to 0.002. For other grades compression‐controlled strain limit
may be determined by dividing the yield strength by modulus of elasticity E and then rounding
the value obtained to four significant digits after the decimal. For example, for Grade 500
reinforcement, the compression‐controlled strain limit shall equal to 0.0025.

Fig. 6.3.3.1—Strain distribution and net tensile strain
6‐24 Vol. 2
Chapter 1
6.3.3.4 Sections are tension‐controlled if the net tensile strain in the extreme tension steel, , is
equal to or greater than 0.005 when the concrete in compression reaches its assumed strain
limit of 0.003. Sections with between the compression‐controlled strain limit and 0.005
constitute a transition region between compression‐controlled and tension‐controlled
sections.
6.3.3.5 Net tensile strain in the extreme tension steel at nominal strength, shall not be less than

0.004 for nonprestressed flexural members and nonprestressed members with factored axial
compressive load less than 0.10
6.3.3.5.1 Use of compression reinforcement shall be permitted in conjunction with additional tension

reinforcement to increase the strength of flexural members.
6.3.3.6 For compression members, design axial strength shall not be taken greater than , ,

computed by Eq. (6.3.2) or (6.3.3).
6.3.3.6.1 For nonprestressed members with spiral reinforcement conforming to Sec. 8.1 or composite
members conforming to 6.3.13:
, 0.85 0.85 – (6.3.2)
6.3.3.6.2 For nonprestressed members with tie reinforcement conforming to Sec. 8.1:
, 0.80 0.85 – (6.3.3)
6.3.3.7 Members subject to compressive axial load shall be designed for the maximum moment that
can accompany the axial load. The factored axial force at given eccentricity shall not exceed
that given in 6.3.3.6. The maximum factored moment shall be magnified for slenderness
effects in accordance with 6.3.10.
6.3.4 Spacing of lateral supports for flexural members
6.3.4.1 Distance between lateral supports for a beam shall not exceed 50 times , the least width of

compression flange or face.
6.3.4.2 Effects of lateral eccentricity of load shall be taken into account in determining spacing of
lateral supports.
6.3.5 Minimum reinforcement for members in flexure
6.3.5.1 At every section of a flexural member where tensile reinforcement is required by analysis,
except as provided in 6.3.5.2, 6.3.5.3, and 6.3.5.4, provided shall not be less than that
given by
.
, 6.3.4
and not less than 1.4 / .

Part 6
Structural Design

6.3.5.2 For statically determinate members with a flange in tension, , shall not be less than the
value given by Eq. (6.3.4), except that is replaced by either 2 or the width of the flange,
whichever is smaller.
6.3.5.3 If, at every section, provided is at least one‐third greater than that required by analysis, the

requirements of 6.3.5.1 and 6.3.5.2 need not be applied.
6.3.5.4 For structural slabs and footings of uniform thickness, , in the direction of the span shall

be the same as that required by 8.1.11. Maximum spacing of this reinforcement shall not
exceed three times the thickness, nor 450 mm.
6.3.6 Distribution of flexural reinforcement in oneway slabs and beams
6.3.6.1 Rules for distribution of flexural reinforcement to control flexural cracking in beams and in
one‐way slabs (slabs reinforced to resist flexural stresses in only one direction) are prescribed
in this section.
6.3.6.2 Distribution of flexural reinforcement in two‐way slabs shall be as required by 6.5.3.
6.3.6.3 As prescribed in 6.3.6.4, flexural tension reinforcement shall be well distributed within
maximum flexural tension zones of a member cross section.
6.3.6.4 The spacing of reinforcement closest to the tension face, , shall be less than that given by
380 2.5 (6.3.5)

but shall not exceed 300 280/ , where is the least distance from surface of
reinforcement to the tension face. If there is only one bar or wire nearest to the extreme
tension face, used in Eq. (6.3.5) is the width of the extreme tension face.
Calculated stress in reinforcement closest to the tension face at service load shall be
computed based on the unfactored moment. It shall be permitted to take as 2/3 .
6.3.6.5 For structures subject to very aggressive exposure or designed to be watertight, provisions of
6.3.6.4 are not sufficient. For such structures, special investigations and precautions are
required.
6.3.6.6 When flanges of T‐beam construction are in tension, part of the flexural tension
reinforcement shall be distributed over an effective flange width as defined in 6.1.13, or a
width equal to one‐tenth the span, whichever is smaller. If the effective flange width exceeds
one‐tenth the span, some longitudinal reinforcement shall be provided in the outer portions
of the flange.
6.3.6.7 Longitudinal skin reinforcement shall be uniformly distributed along both side faces of a
member (Fig. 6.3.6.1), where of a beam or joist exceeds 900 mm. Skin reinforcement shall
extend for a distance ⁄2 from the tension face. The spacing shall be as provided in 6.3.6.4,
where is the least distance from the surface of the skin reinforcement to the side face. It
shall be permitted to include such reinforcement in strength computations if a strain
compatibility analysis is made to determine stress in the individual bars or wires.
6‐26 Vol. 2
Chapter 1

Fig. 6.3.6.1—Skin reinforcement for beams and joists with h > 900 mm.
6.3.7 Deep beams
6.3.7.1 Deep beams are members loaded on one face and supported on the opposite face so that
compression struts can develop between the loads and the supports, and have either:
a) clear spans, , equal to or less than four times the overall member depth; or
b) regions with concentrated loads within twice the member depth from the face of the
support.
Deep beams shall be designed either taking into account nonlinear distribution of strain, or by
Appendix A. (See also 6.4.6.1 and 8.2.7.6) Lateral buckling shall be considered.
6.3.7.2 of deep beams shall be in accordance with 6.4.6.
6.3.7.3 Minimum area of flexural tension reinforcement, , , shall conform to 6.3.5.
6.3.7.4 Minimum horizontal and vertical reinforcement in the side faces of deep beams shall satisfy
either A.3.3 or 6.4.6.4 and 6.4.6.5.
6.3.8 Design dimensions for compression members
6.3.8.1 Isolated compression member with multiple spirals
Outer limits of the effective cross section of a compression member with two or more interlocking spirals
shall be taken at a distance outside the extreme limits of the spirals equal to the minimum concrete cover
required by 8.1.7.
6.3.8.2 Monolithically built compression member with wall
Outer limits of the effective cross section of a spirally reinforced or tied reinforced compression member
built monolithically with a concrete wall or pier shall be taken not greater than 40 mm outside the spiral
or tie reinforcement.
6.3.8.3 Equivalent circular compression member replacing other shapes
In lieu of using the full gross area for design of a compression member with a square, octagonal, or other
shaped cross section, it shall be permitted to use a circular section with a diameter equal to the least
lateral dimension of the actual shape. Gross area considered, required percentage of reinforcement, and
design strength shall be based on that circular section.
6.3.8.4 Limits of section
For a compression member with a cross section larger than required by considerations of loading, it shall
be permitted to base the minimum reinforcement and strength on a reduced effective area not less

Part 6
Structural Design

than one‐half the total area. This provision shall not apply to special moment frames or special structural
walls designed in accordance with Sec. 8.3.
6.3.9 Limits of reinforcement for compression members
6.3.9.1 For noncomposite compression members, the area of longitudinal reinforcement, , shall be

not less than 0.01 or more than 0.06 . To avoid practical difficulties in placing and
compacting of concrete as well as to deliver ductility to noncomposite compression members,
area of longitudinal reinforcement, , is preferred not to exceed 0.04 unless absolutely
essential.
6.3.9.2 Minimum number of longitudinal bars in compression members shall be 4 for bars within
rectangular or circular ties, 3 for bars within triangular ties, and 6 for bars enclosed by spirals
conforming to 6.3.9.3.
6.3.9.3 Volumetric spiral reinforcement ratio, , shall be not less than the value given by
0.45 1 6.3.6

where the value of used in Eq. (6.3.6) shall not exceed 700 MPa. For greater than 420
MPa, lap splices according to 8.1.9.3(e) shall not be used.
6.3.10 Slenderness effects in compression members
6.3.10.1 Slenderness effects shall be permitted to be neglected in the following cases:
a) for compression members not braced against sidesway when:
ℓ
22 6.3.7
b) for compression members braced against sidesway when:
ℓ
34 12 ⁄ 40 6.3.8
where ⁄ is positive if the column is bent in single curvature, and negative if the member is bent in
double curvature.
Compression members may be considered to be braced against sidesway when bracing elements have a
total stiffness, resisting lateral movement of that story, of at least 12 times the gross stiffness of the
columns within the story.
The Jackson and Moreland Alignment Charts (Fig. 6.3.10.1), which allow a graphical determination of for
a column of constant cross section in a multibay frame may be used as the primary design aid to estimate
the effective length factor .
6‐28 Vol. 2
Chapter 1
6.3.10.1.1 The unsupported length of a compression member, , shall be taken as the clear distance
between floor slabs, beams, or other members capable of providing lateral support in the
direction being considered. Where column capitals or haunches are present, shall be
measured to the lower extremity of the capital or haunch in the plane considered.
6.3.10.1.2 It shall be permitted to take the radius of gyration, , equal to 0.30 times the overall
dimension in the direction stability is being considered for rectangular compression members
and 0.25 times the diameter for circular compression members. For other shapes, it shall be
permitted to compute for the gross concrete section.
Fig. 6.3.10.1—Effective length factors k.

Part 6
Structural Design

6.3.10.2 When slenderness effects are not neglected as permitted by 6.3.10.1, the design of
compression members, restraining beams, and other supporting members shall be based on
the factored forces and moments from a second‐order analysis satisfying 6.3.10.3, 6.3.10.4, or
6.3.10.5. These members shall also satisfy 6.3.10.2.1 and 6.3.10.2.2. The dimensions of each
member cross section used in the analysis shall be within 10 percent of the dimensions of the
members shown on the design drawings or the analysis shall be repeated.
6.3.10.2.1 Total moment including second‐order effects in compression members, restraining beams, or
other structural members shall not exceed 1.4 times the moment due to first‐order effects.
6.3.10.2.2 Second‐order effects shall be considered along the length of compression members. It shall
be permitted to account for these effects using the moment magnification procedure outlined
in 6.3.10.6.
6.3.10.3 Nonlinear second‐order analysis
Second‐order analysis shall consider material nonlinearity, member curvature and lateral drift, duration of
loads, shrinkage and creep, and interaction with the supporting foundation. The analysis procedure shall
have been shown to result in prediction of strength in substantial agreement with results of
comprehensive tests of columns in statically indeterminate reinforced concrete structures.
6.3.10.4 Elastic second‐order analysis
Elastic second‐order analysis shall consider section properties determined taking into account the
influence of axial loads, the presence of cracked regions along the length of the member, and the effects
of load duration.
6.3.10.4.1 It shall be permitted to use the following properties for the members in the structure:
a) Modulus of elasticity ...................... from 6.1.7.1
b) Moments of inertia,
Compression members:
Columns 0.70
Walls —Uncracked 0.70
—Cracked 0.35
Flexural members:
Beams 0.35
Flat plates and flat slabs 0.25
c) Area 1.0
Alternatively, the moments of inertia of compression and flexural members, , shall be
permitted to be computed as follows:
Compression members:
0.80 25 1 0.5 0.875 (6.3.9)

where and shall be determined from the particular load combination under
consideration, or the combination of and determined in the smallest value of . need
not be taken less than 0.35 .
Flexural members:
0.10 25 1.2 0.2 0.5 (6.3.10)
6‐30 Vol. 2
Chapter 1
For continuous flexural members, shall be permitted to be taken as the average of values
obtained from Eq. (6.3.10) for the critical positive and negative moment sections. need not
be taken less than 0.25 . The cross‐sectional dimensions and reinforcement ratio used in the
above formulas shall be within 10 percent of the dimensions and reinforcement ratio shown
on the design drawings or the stiffness evaluation shall be repeated.
6.3.10.4.2 When sustained lateral loads are present, for compression members shall be divided by
1 . The term shall be taken as the ratio of maximum factored sustained shear
within a story to the maximum factored shear in that story associated with the same load
combination, but shall not be taken greater than 1.0.
6.3.10.5 Procedure for moment magnification
Columns and stories in structures shall be designated as nonsway or sway columns or stories. The design
of columns in nonsway frames or stories shall be based on 6.3.10.6. The design of columns in sway frames
or stories shall be based on 6.3.10.7.
6.3.10.5.1 A column in a structure shall be permitted to be assumed as nonsway if the increase in
column end moments due to second‐order effects does not exceed 5 percent of the first‐
order end moments.
6.3.10.5.2 A story within a structure is permitted to be assumed as nonsway if:
∑ ∆
0.05 (6.3.11)
ℓ
where ∑ and are the total factored vertical load and the horizontal story shear, respectively, in the
story being evaluated, and is the first‐order relative lateral deflection between the top and the bottom
of that story due to .
6.3.10.6 Procedure for moment magnification — Nonsway
Compression members shall be designed for factored axial force and the factored moment amplified
for the effects of member curvature where
(6.3.12)
where
1.0 (6.3.13)
.
and
6.3.14
ℓ
6.3.10.6.1 shall be taken as
.
(6.3.15)
or
.
(6.3.16)
As an alternative, shall be permitted to be computed using the value of from Eq. (6.3.9) divided by
1 .

Part 6
Structural Design

6.3.10.6.2 The term shall be taken as the ratio of maximum factored axial sustained load to
maximum factored axial load associated with the same load combination, but shall not be
taken greater than 1.0.
6.3.10.6.3 The effective length factor, , shall be permitted to be taken as 1.0.
6.3.10.6.4 For members with no transverse load between supports, shall be taken as

0.6 0.4 (6.3.17)
where ⁄ is positive if the column is bent in single curvature, and negative if the member is bent in
double curvature. For members with transverse loads between supports, shall be taken as 1.0.
6.3.10.6.5 Factored moment, , in Eq. (6.3.12) shall not be taken less than

, 15 0.03 (6.3.18)
about each axis separately, where 0.6 and are in mm. For members in which , exceeds , the
value of in Eq. (6.3.17) shall either be taken equal to 1.0, or shall be based on the ratio of the
computed end moments, ⁄ .
6.3.10.7 Procedure for moment magnification — Sway
Moments and at the ends of an individual compression member shall be taken as
(6.3.19)
(6.3.20)
where is computed according to 6.3.10.7.3 or 6.3.10.7.4.
6.3.10.7.1 Flexural members shall be designed for the total magnified end moments of the compression
members at the joint.
6.3.10.7.2 The values of and given in 6.3.10.4 shall be used for determining the effective length
factor and it shall not be less than 1.0.
6.3.10.7.3 The moment magnifier shall be calculated as

1 (6.3.21)
If calculated by Eq. (6.3.21) exceeds 1.5, shall be calculated using second‐order elastic analysis or
6.3.10.7.4.
6.3.10.7.4 Alternatively, it shall be permitted to calculate as
∑ 1 (6.3.22)
. ∑
where ∑ is the summation for all the factored vertical loads in a story and ∑ is the summation for all

sway‐resisting columns in a story. is calculated using Eq. (6.3.14) with determined from 6.3.10.7.2 and
from 6.3.10.6.1.
6.3.11 Axially loaded members supporting slab system
Axially loaded members supporting a slab system included within the scope of 6.5.1 shall be designed as
provided in Sec. 6.3 and in accordance with the additional requirements of Sec. 6.5.
6.3.12 Column load transmission through floor system
If of a column is greater than 1.4 times that of the floor system, transmission of load through the floor
system shall be provided by 6.3.12.1, 6.3.12.2, or 6.3.12.3.
6‐32 Vol. 2
Chapter 1
6.3.12.1 Concrete of strength specified for the column shall be placed in the floor at the column
location. Top surface of the column concrete shall extend 2 ft into the slab from face of
column. Column concrete shall be well integrated with floor concrete, and shall be placed in
accordance with relevant provisions for construction joints of columns, walls etc. with beams,
slabs etc. To avoid accidental placing of lower strength concrete in the columns, the structural
designer shall indicate on the drawing where the high and low strength concretes are to be
placed.
6.3.12.2 Strength of a column through a floor system shall be based on the lower value of concrete
strength with vertical dowels and spirals as required.
6.3.12.3 For columns laterally supported on four sides by beams of approximately equal depth or by
slabs, it shall be permitted to base strength of the column on an assumed concrete strength in
the column joint equal to 75 percent of column concrete strength plus 35 percent of floor
concrete strength. In the application of 6.3.12.3, the ratio of column concrete strength to slab
concrete strength shall not be taken greater than 2.5 for design.
6.3.13 Composite compression members
6.3.13.1 All members reinforced longitudinally with structural steel shapes, pipe, or tubing with or
without longitudinal bars shall be included in composite compression members.
6.3.13.2 A composite member strength shall be computed for the same limiting conditions applicable
to ordinary reinforced concrete members.
6.3.13.3 Any axial load strength assigned to concrete of a composite member shall be transferred to
the concrete by members or brackets in direct bearing on the composite member concrete.
6.3.13.4 All axial load strength not assigned to concrete of a composite member shall be developed by
direct connection to the structural steel shape, pipe, or tube.
6.3.13.5 For evaluation of slenderness effects, radius of gyration, , of a composite section shall be not

greater than the value given by
⁄
(6.3.23)
/
and, as an alternative to a more accurate calculation, in Eq. (6.3.14) shall be taken either as Eq. (6.3.15)
or
/
(6.3.24)
6.3.13.6 Concrete core encased by structural steel
6.3.13.6.1 When a composite member is a structural steel encased concrete core, the thickness of the
steel encasement shall be not less than for each face of width nor for circular

sections of diameter
6.3.13.6.2 When computing and , longitudinal bars located within the encased concrete core shall

be permitted to be used.
6.3.13.7 Spiral reinforcement around structural steel core
A composite member with spirally reinforced concrete around a structural steel core shall conform to
6.3.13.7.1 through 6.3.13.7.4.

Part 6
Structural Design

6.3.13.7.1 Design yield strength of structural steel core shall be the specified minimum yield strength for
the grade of structural steel used but not to exceed 350 MPa.
6.3.13.7.2 Spiral reinforcement shall conform to 6.3.9.3.
6.3.13.7.3 Longitudinal bars located within the spiral shall be not less than 0.01 nor more than 0.06 times
net area of concrete section.
6.3.13.7.4 Longitudinal bars located within the spiral shall be permitted to be used in computing and

.
6.3.13.8 Tie reinforcement around structural steel core
Laterally tied concrete around a structural steel core forming a composite member shall conform to
6.3.13.8.1 through 6.3.13.8.7.
6.3.13.8.1 Design yield strength of structural steel core shall be the specified minimum yield strength for
the grade of structural steel used but not to exceed 350 MPa.
6.3.13.8.2 Lateral ties shall extend completely around the structural steel core.
6.3.13.8.3 Lateral ties shall have a diameter not less than 0.02 times the greatest side dimension of
composite member, except that ties shall not be smaller than φ 10 mm and are not required
to be larger than φ 16 mm. Welded wire reinforcement of equivalent area shall be permitted.
6.3.13.8.4 Vertical spacing of lateral ties shall not exceed 16 longitudinal bar diameters, 48 tie bar
diameters, or 0.5 times the least side dimension of the composite member.
6.3.13.8.5 Longitudinal bars located within the ties shall be not less than 0.01 nor more than 0.06 times
net area of concrete section.
6.3.13.8.6 A longitudinal bar shall be located at every corner of a rectangular cross section, with other
longitudinal bars spaced not farther apart than onehalf the least side dimension of the
composite member.
6.3.13.8.7 Longitudinal bars located within the ties shall be permitted to be used in computing and

.
6.3.14 Bearing strength
6.3.14.1 Design bearing strength of concrete shall not exceed 0.85 , except when the
supporting surface is wider on all sides than the loaded area, then the design bearing strength
of the loaded area shall be permitted to be multiplied by but by not more than 2
(Fig. 6.3.14.1).

6‐34 Vol. 2
Chapter 1
45 deg
45 deg
Loaded area
A1
Plan
Loaded area A 1
Load
2
1
A 2 is measured on this plane
Elevation
Fig. 6.3.14.1 ‐ Determination or area A2 in stepped or sloped supports using frustum (6.3.14.1).
6.3.15 Design for Flexure
6.3.15.1 Design of Rectangular Beams
a) Formula for singly reinforced beams : The following equations which are based on the
simplified stress block of 6.3.2.7, are applicable to singly reinforced rectangular beams
along with T‐beams where the neutral axis lies within the flange.

(6.3.25)
/

where

(6.3.26)
.

Part 6
Structural Design

By estimating an initial value of a, Eq (6.3.25) can be used to determine an approximate
value of . That value can be substituted in Eq (6.3.26) to get a better estimate of and
hence a new /2 can be determined for substitution in Eq (6.3.25).
In Eq (6.3.25), nominal flexural strength of section, may be taken as factored moment
at section, divided by strength reduction factor, 0.9 as a preliminary value.
determined from Eq (6.3.25) shall have to give a reinforcement ratio, ⁄ not
exceeding , where
0.85 1 0.004
(6.3.27)
Above, 0.003
Additionally, determined from Eq (6.3.25) shall have to satisfy the requirements of
minimum reinforcement for members in flexure as per 6.3.5.
Revised shall be determined from 6.2.3.2 based on either ⁄ ⁄ 1 or , where
is the net tensile strain in the reinforcement furthest from the compression face of the
concrete at the depth . Strain, may be calculated from Eq. (6.3.27) by replacing
0.004 by and by .

b) Design formulae for doubly reinforced beams: A doubly reinforced beam shall be designed
only when there is a restriction on depth of beam and maximum tensile reinforcement allowed
cannot produce the required moment .
To establish if doubly reinforced beam is required the following approach can be followed:
Determine,
0.005 0.85 1 0.005

(6.3.28)
0.005

.
(6.3.29)
If is less than required moment with 0.9 , a doubly reinforced beam is needed and
then taking values of and from above, put
and

Then, the following values are to be evaluated,
(6.3.30)

Assuming compression steel yields (needs to be checked later),

Check for compression steel yielding, where
0.85 (6.3.31)

If (i.e. compression steel yields),
6‐36 Vol. 2
Chapter 1

find
.
and find , and confirm 0.9 in the above equations. Value of shall
be determined from 6.2.3.2 based on either ⁄ ⁄ or , as stated above for
rectangular beams.
If compression steel does not yield, is to be found from concrete section force equilibrium
condition, C=T which will result in a quadratic equation of . needs to be calculated from strain
diagram and revised.

shall be calculated from for finding .
6.3.15.2 Design of T‐Beams
a) General:
For effective widths and other parameters for T‐, L‐ or isolated beams, 6.1.13.2 to
6.1.13.4 shall apply.

b) Formulae for T‐beams : A T‐beam shall be treated as a rectangular beam if where
is obtained from Eq (6.3.26). In using Eq (6.3.26), if is not known, it may be initially
assumed as :
(6.3.32)
/

If , thus obtained, is greater than the beam shall be considered as a T‐beam, in
which case the following formulae shall be applicable :

0.85
(6.3.33)

1 ⁄2 (6.3.34)

2 1 (6.3.35)

(6.3.36)
/
and (6.3.37)
.

By estimating an initial value of a, Eq (6.3.36) can be used to obtain an approximate value of

. That value of can be substituted in Eq (6.3.37) to get a better estimate of .
Net tensile strain requirements will be satisfied as long as depth to neutral axis, 0.429 .
This will occur if
,
Where, (6.3.38)
And, , (6.3.39)
Again, (6.3.40)

Part 6
Structural Design

And is as defined by Eq. (6.3.27). For ⁄ ratios between 0.429 and 0.375, equivalent to
between the , from Eq. (6.3.39) and , calculated by substituting from Eq. (6.3.27) with
0.005 in place of 0.004 and for , the strength reduction factor, must be adjusted for in
accordance with 6.2.3.2.
6.4 SHEAR AND TORSION
6.4.1 Shear strength
6.4.1.1 Except for members designed in accordance with Appendix A, design of cross sections subject
to shear shall be based on
6.4.1
where is the factored shear force at the section considered and is nominal shear
strength computed by
6.4.2
where is nominal shear strength provided by concrete calculated in accordance with 6.4.2,
or 6.4.10, and is nominal shear strength provided by shear reinforcement calculated in
accordance with 6.4.3, 6.4.8.9, or 6.4.10.
6.4.1.1.1 The effect of any openings in members shall be considered in determining .
6.4.1.1.2 In evaluating , whenever applicable, effects of axial tension due to creep and shrinkage in

restrained members shall be considered and effects of inclined flexural compression in
variable depth members shall be permitted to be included.
6.4.1.2 Except as allowed in 6.4.1.2.1, the values of used in this chapter shall not exceed 8.3
MPa.
6.4.1.2.1 Values of greater than 8.3 MPa shall be permitted in computing , , and for
reinforced concrete beams and concrete joist construction having minimum web
reinforcement in accordance with 6.4.3.5.3, or 6.4.4.5.2.
6.4.1.3 Computation of maximum at supports in accordance with 6.4.1.3.1 shall be permitted if all

conditions (a), (b), and (c) are satisfied:
a) Support reaction, in direction of applied shear, introduces compression into the end
regions of member;
b) Loads are applied at or near the top of the member;
c) No concentrated load occurs between face of support and location of critical section
defined in 6.4.1.3.1.
6‐38 Vol. 2
Chapter 1
6.4.1.3.1 Sections located less than a distance from face of support shall be permitted to be designed

for computed at a distance .
6.4.1.4 For deep beams, brackets and corbels, walls, and slabs and footings, the special provisions of
6.4.6 through 6.4.10 shall apply.
6.4.2 Contribution of concrete to shear strength
6.4.2.1 shall be computed by provisions of 6.4.2.1.1 through 6.4.2.1.3, unless a more detailed
calculation is made in accordance with 6.4.2.2. Throughout this chapter, except in 6.4.5,
shall be as defined in 6.1.8.1.
6.4.2.1.1 For members subject to shear and flexure only,
0.17λ 6.4.3
6.4.2.1.2 For members subject to axial compression,
0.17 1 λ 6.4.4
Quantity ⁄ shall be expressed in MPa.
6.4.2.1.3 For members subject to significant axial tension, shall be taken as zero unless a more
detailed analysis is made using 6.4.2.2.3.
6.4.2.2 shall be permitted to be computed by the more detailed calculation of 6.4.2.2.1 through
6.4.2.2.3.
6.4.2.2.1 For members subject to shear and flexure only,
0.16λ 17 6.4.5
but not greater than 0.29 . When computing by Eq. (6.4.5), / shall not be

taken greater than 1.0, where occurs simultaneously with at section considered.
6.4.2.2.2 For members subject to axial compression, it shall be permitted to compute using Eq.
(6.4.5) with substituted for and / not then limited to 1.0, where
6.4.6
However, shall not be taken greater than
.
0.29λ 1 6.4.7
⁄ shall be expressed in MPa. When as computed by Eq. (6.4.6) is negative, shall be

computed by Eq. (6.4.7).
6.4.2.2.3 For members subject to significant axial tension,
.
0.17 1 λ 6.4.8
but not less than zero, where is negative for tension. ⁄ shall be expressed in MPa.

Part 6
Structural Design

6.4.2.3 For circular members, the area used to compute shall be taken as the product of the
diameter and effective depth of the concrete section. It shall be permitted to take as 0.80
times the diameter of the concrete section.
6.4.3 Shear strength contribution of reinforcement
6.4.3.1 Types of shear reinforcement
6.4.3.1.1
The following types of shear reinforcement shall be permitted:
a) Stirrups perpendicular to axis of member;
b) Welded wire reinforcement with wires located perpendicular to axis of member;
c) Spirals, circular ties, or hoops.
d) Stirrups making an angle of 45 degrees or more with longitudinal tension reinforcement;
e) Longitudinal reinforcement with bent portion making an angle of 30 degrees or more
with the longitudinal tension reinforcement;
f) Combinations of stirrups and bent longitudinal reinforcement.
6.4.3.2
The values of and used in design of shear reinforcement shall not exceed 420 MPa, except the value
shall not exceed 550 MPa for welded deformed wire reinforcement.
6.4.3.3
Stirrups and other bars or wires used as shear reinforcement shall extend to a distance from extreme
compression fiber and shall be developed at both ends according to 8.2.10.
6.4.3.4 Limits in spacing for shear reinforcement
6.4.3.4.1
Spacing of shear reinforcement placed perpendicular to axis of member shall not exceed ⁄2, nor 600
mm.
6.4.3.4.2
The spacing of inclined stirrups and bent longitudinal reinforcement shall be such that every 45‐degree
line, extending toward the reaction from mid‐depth of member ⁄2 to longitudinal tension
reinforcement, shall be crossed by at least one line of shear reinforcement.
6.4.3.4.3
Where exceeds 0.33 , maximum spacings given in 6.4.3.4.1 and 6.4.3.4.2 shall be reduced by
one‐half.
6.4.3.5 Minimum shear reinforcement
6.4.3.5.1
A minimum area of shear reinforcement, , , shall be provided in all reinforced concrete flexural
members, where exceeds 0.5 , except in members satisfying one or more of (a) through (f):
a) Footings and solid slabs;
b) Hollow‐core units with total untopped depth not greater than 315 mm and hollow‐core
units where is not greater than 0.5 ;
c) Concrete joist construction defined by 6.1.14;
d) Beams with not greater than 250 mm;
e) Beam integral with slabs with not greater than 600 mm and not greater than the larger
of 2.5 times thickness of flange, and 0.5 times width of web;
6‐40 Vol. 2
Chapter 1
f) Beams constructed of steel fiber‐reinforced, normalweight concrete with not

exceeding 40 MPa, not greater than 600 mm, and not greater than 0.17 .
6.4.3.5.2
Minimum shear reinforcement requirements of 6.4.3.5.1 shall be permitted to be waived if shown by test
that required and can be developed when shear reinforcement is omitted. Such tests shall
simulate effects of differential settlement, creep, shrinkage, and temperature change, based on a realistic
assessment of such effects occurring in service.
6.4.3.5.3
Where shear reinforcement is required by 6.4.3.5.1 or for strength and where 6.4.4.1 allows torsion to be
neglected, , shall be computed by
, 0.062 (6.4.9)
but shall not be less than 0.35 / .
6.4.3.6 Design of shear reinforcement
6.4.3.6.1 Where exceeds , shear reinforcement shall be provided to satisfy Eq. (6.4.1) and
(6.4.2), where shall be computed in accordance with 6.4.3.6.2 through 6.4.3.6.9.
6.4.3.6.2 Where shear reinforcement perpendicular to axis of member is used,
6.4.10
where is the area of shear reinforcement within spacing .
6.4.3.6.3 Where circular ties, hoops, or spirals are used as shear reinforcement, shall be computed

using Eq. (6.4.10) where is defined in 6.4.2.3 for circular members, shall be taken as two
times the area of the bar in a circular tie, hoop, or spiral at a spacing , is measured in a
direction parallel to longitudinal reinforcement, and is the specified yield strength of
circular tie, hoop, or spiral reinforcement.
6.4.3.6.4 Where inclined stirrups are used as shear reinforcement,

6.4.11
where is angle between inclined stirrups and longitudinal axis of the member, and is measured in
direction parallel to longitudinal reinforcement.
6.4.3.6.5 Where shear reinforcement consists of a single bar or a single group of parallel bars, all bent
up at the same distance from the support,
sin 6.4.12
but not greater than 0.25 , where α is angle between bent‐up reinforcement and longitudinal
axis of the member.

Part 6
Structural Design

6.4.3.6.6 Where shear reinforcement consists of a series of parallel bent‐up bars or groups of parallel
bent‐up bars at different distances from the support, shall be computed by Eq. (6.4.11).
6.4.3.6.7 Only the center three‐fourths of the inclined portion of any longitudinal bent bar shall be
considered effective for shear reinforcement.
6.4.3.6.8 Where more than one type of shear reinforcement is used to reinforce the same portion of a
member, shall be computed as the sum of the values computed for the various types of
shear reinforcement.
6.4.3.6.9 shall not be taken greater than 0.66 .
6.4.4 Design for torsion
Design for torsion shall be in accordance with 6.4.4.1 through 6.4.4.6. A beam subjected to torsion is
idealized as a thin‐walled tube with the core concrete cross section in a solid beam neglected as shown in
Fig. 6.4.4.1.
T
Shear flow (q)
(a) Thin-walled tube
(b) Area enclosed by shear flow path

Fig. 6.4.4.1‐ (a) Torsional resistance by thin‐walled tube (6.4.4); (b) Ineffective inner area enclosed by shear
flow path (6.4.4)
6.4.4.1 Threshold torsion
It shall be permitted to neglect torsion effects if the factored torsional moment is less than:
a) For members not subjected to axial tension or compression
0.083λ
b) For members subjected to an axial compressive or tensile force
6‐42 Vol. 2
Chapter 1
0.083λ 1
0.33 λ
The overhanging flange width used in computing and for members cast monolithically with a slab
shall conform to 6.5.2.4. For a hollow section, shall be used in place of in 6.4.4.1, and the outer
boundaries of the section shall conform to 6.5.2.4.
6.4.4.1.1 For members cast monolithically with a slab and for isolated members with flanges, the
overhanging flange width used to compute and shall conform to 6.5.2.4, except that
the overhanging flanges shall be neglected in cases where the parameter calculated
for a beam with flanges is less than that computed for the same beam ignoring the flanges.
6.4.4.2 Evaluation of factored torsional moment
6.4.4.2.1 If the factored torsional moment, , in a member is required to maintain equilibrium (Fig.
6.4.4.2) and exceeds the minimum value given in 6.4.4.1, the member shall be designed to
carry in accordance with 6.4.4.3 through 6.4.4.6.
6.4.4.2.2 In a statically indeterminate structure where reduction of the torsional moment in a member
can occur due to redistribution of internal forces upon cracking (Fig. 6.4.4.3), the maximum
shall be permitted to be reduced to the values given in (a), or (b) as applicable:
a) For members, at the sections described in 6.4.4.2.4 and not subjected to axial tension or
compression
0.33λ
b) For members subjected to an axial compressive or tensile force
0.33λ 1
0.33 λ
In (a), or (b), the correspondingly redistributed bending moments and shears in the adjoining members
shall be used in the design of these members. For hollow sections, shall not be replaced with in
6.4.4.2.2.

Part 6
Structural Design

6.4.4.2.3 It shall be permitted to take the torsional loading from a slab as uniformly distributed along
the member, if not determined by a more exact analysis.
6.4.4.2.4 Sections located closer than a distance from the face of a support shall be designed for not

less than computed at a distance . If a concentrated torque occurs within this distance,
the critical section for design shall be at the face of the support.
Designtorque may not be

reduced because moment
redistribution is notpossible
Fig. 6.4.4.2 – Design torque may not be reduced (6.4.4.2.1)
Designtorque for this spandrel

beam may be reduced because
moment redistribution is possible
Fig. 6.4.4.3 – Design torque may be reduced (6.4.4.2.2)
6.4.4.3 Torsional moment strength
6.4.4.3.1 The cross‐sectional dimensions shall be such that:
a) For solid sections
0.66 6.4.13
.
b) For hollow sections
0.66 6.4.14
.
6‐44 Vol. 2
Chapter 1
Superposition of shear stresses due to shear and torsion in hollow sections given by the left side of the
inequality 6.4.14 is illustrated by Fig. 6.4.4.4(a) and that in solid sections given by the left side of the
inequality 6.4.13 is illustrated by Fig. 6.4.4.4(b).
6.4.4.3.2 If the wall thickness varies around the perimeter of a hollow section, Eq. (6.4.14) shall be
evaluated at the location where the left‐hand side of Eq. (6.4.14) is a maximum.
6.4.4.3.3 If the wall thickness is less than ⁄ , the second term in Eq. (6.4.14) shall be taken as

.
where is the thickness of the wall of the hollow section at the location where the stresses are being
checked.
6.4.4.3.4 The values of and used for design of torsional reinforcement shall not exceed 420 MPa.
6.4.4.3.5 Where exceeds the threshold torsion, design of the cross section shall be based on

6.4.15
6.4.4.3.6 shall be computed by
6.4.16
where shall be determined by analysis except that it shall be permitted to take equal to 0.85 ;
shall not be taken smaller than 30 degrees nor larger than 60 degrees. It shall be permitted to take θ
equal to 45 degrees.
6.4.4.3.7 The additional area of longitudinal reinforcement to resist torsion, , shall not be less than
6.4.17
where shall be the same value used in Eq. (6.4.16) and / shall be taken as the amount computed
from Eq. (6.4.16) not modified in accordance with 6.4.4.5.2 or 6.4.4.5.3; refers to closed transverse
torsional reinforcement, and refers to longitudinal torsional reinforcement.

Part 6
Structural Design

6.4.4.3.8 Reinforcement required for torsion shall be added to that required for the shear, moment,
and axial force that act in combination with the torsion. The most restrictive requirements for
reinforcement spacing and placement shall be met.
6.4.4.3.9 It shall be permitted to reduce the area of longitudinal torsion reinforcement in the flexural
compression zone by an amount equal to ⁄ 0.9 , where occurs at the section
simultaneously with , except that the reinforcement provided shall not be less than that
required by 6.4.4.5.3 or 6.4.4.6.2.
B B
A A
C C
Torsional stresses Shear stresses
(a) Hollow section
Torsional stresses Shear stresses

(b) Solid section
Fig. 6.4.4.4 – Superposition of torsional and shear stresses (6.4.4.3.1)
6.4.4.4 Details of torsional reinforcement
6.4.4.4.1 Torsion reinforcement shall consist of longitudinal bars or tendons and one or more of the
following:
a) Closed stirrups or closed ties, perpendicular to the axis of the member;
b) A closed cage of welded wire reinforcement with transverse wires perpendicular to the
axis of the member;
c) Spiral reinforcement.
6.4.4.4.2 Transverse torsional reinforcement shall be anchored by one of the following:
a) A 135‐degree standard hook, or seismic hook as defined in 8.1.1(d), around a longitudinal
bar;
b) According to 8.2.10.2a, 8.2.10.2b, or 8.2.10.2c in regions where the concrete surrounding
the anchorage is restrained against spalling by a flange or slab or similar member.
6‐46 Vol. 2
Chapter 1
6.4.4.4.3 Longitudinal torsion reinforcement shall be developed at both ends.
6.4.4.4.4 For hollow sections in torsion, the distance from the centerline of the transverse torsional
reinforcement to the inside face of the wall of the hollow section shall not be less than
0.5 ⁄ .
6.4.4.5 Minimum torsion reinforcement
6.4.4.5.1 A minimum area of torsional reinforcement shall be provided in all regions where exceeds

the threshold torsion given in 6.4.4.1.
6.4.4.5.2 Where torsional reinforcement is required by 6.4.4.5.1, the minimum area of transverse
closed stirrups shall be computed by
2 0.062 6.4.18
but shall not be less than 0.35 ⁄ .
6.4.4.5.3 Where torsional reinforcement is required by 6.4.4.5.1, the minimum total area of
longitudinal torsional reinforcement, , , shall be computed by
.
, 6.4.19
where / shall not be taken less than 0.175 ⁄ ; refers to closed transverse torsional
reinforcement, and refers to longitudinal reinforcement.

Part 6
Structural Design

6.4.4.6 Spacing of torsion reinforcement
6.4.4.6.1 The spacing of transverse torsion reinforcement shall not exceed the smaller of ⁄8 or 300

mm.
6.4.4.6.2 The longitudinal reinforcement required for torsion shall be distributed around the perimeter
of the closed stirrups with a maximum spacing of 300 mm. The longitudinal bars shall be
inside the stirrups. There shall be at least one longitudinal bar in each corner of the stirrups.
Longitudinal bars shall have a diameter at least 0.042 times the stirrup spacing, but not less
than Φ10 mm.
6.4.4.6.3 Torsional reinforcement shall be provided for a distance of at least beyond the point

required by analysis.
6.4.5 Shearfriction
6.4.5.1 Application of provisions of 6.4.5 shall be for cases where it is appropriate to consider shear
transfer across a given plane, such as: an existing or potential crack, an interface between
dissimilar materials, or an interface between two concretes cast at different times.
6.4.5.2 Design of cross sections subject to shear transfer as described in 6.4.5.1 shall be based on Eq.
(6.4.1), where is calculated in accordance with provisions of 6.4.5.3 or 6.4.5.4.
6.4.5.3 A crack shall be assumed to occur along the shear plane considered. The required area of
shear‐friction reinforcement across the shear plane shall be designed using either 6.4.5.4
or any other shear transfer design methods that result in prediction of strength in substantial
agreement with results of comprehensive tests.
6.4.5.3.1 Provisions of 6.4.5.5 through 6.4.5.10 shall apply for all calculations of shear transfer strength.
6.4.5.4 Design method for shear‐friction
6.4.5.4.1 Where shear‐friction reinforcement is perpendicular to the shear plane, shall be computed

by

6.4.20
where is coefficient of friction in accordance with 6.4.5.4.3.
6.4.5.4.2 Where shear‐friction reinforcement is inclined to the shear plane, such that the shear force
produces tension in shear‐friction reinforcement (Fig. 6.4.5.1), shall be computed by
6.4.21
where is angle between shear‐friction reinforcement and shear plane.
6.4.5.4.3 The coefficient of friction µ in Eq. (6.4.20) and Eq. (6.4.21) shall be taken as:

Concrete placed monolithically 1.4
Concrete placed against hardened concrete with surface 1.0
intentionally roughened as specified in 6.4.5.9
Concrete placed against hardened concrete not intentionally 0.6
roughened
Concrete anchored to as‐rolled structural steel by headed studs 0.7
or by reinforcing bars (see 6.4.5.10)
6‐48 Vol. 2
Chapter 1
where 1.0 for normalweight concrete and 0.75 for all lightweight concrete. Otherwise, λ shall be
determined based on volumetric proportions of lightweight and normalweight aggregates as specified in
6.1.8.1, but shall not exceed 0.85.
6.4.5.5 For normalweight concrete either placed monolithically or placed against hardened concrete
with surface intentionally roughened as specified in 6.4.5.9, shall not exceed the smallest
of 0.2 , 3.3 0.08 and 11 , where is area of concrete section resisting shear
transfer. For all other cases, shall not exceed the smaller of 0.2 or 5.5 . Where
concretes of different strengths are cast against each other, the value of used to evaluate
shall be that of the lower‐strength concrete.
6.4.5.6 The value of used for design of shear‐friction reinforcement shall not exceed 420 MPa.
6.4.5.7 Net tension across shear plane shall be resisted by additional reinforcement. Permanent net
compression across shear plane shall be permitted to be taken as additive to , the force
in the shear‐friction reinforcement, when calculating required .
6.4.5.8 Shear‐friction reinforcement shall be appropriately placed along the shear plane and shall be
anchored to develop on both sides by embedment, hooks, or welding to special devices.
6.4.5.9 For the purpose of 6.4.5, when concrete is placed against previously hardened concrete, the
interface for shear transfer shall be clean and free of laitance. If is assumed equal to 1.0 ,
interface shall be roughened to a full amplitude of approximately 6 mm.
6.4.5.10 When shear is transferred between as‐rolled steel and concrete using headed studs or welded
reinforcing bars, steel shall be clean and free of paint.
Assumed crack
and shear plane
Applied shear
Vu
Shear friction
reinforcement, Avf

Fig. 6.4.5.1 – Shear‐friction reinforcement at an angle to assumed crack (6.4.5.4.2).

Part 6
Structural Design

6.4.6 Deep beams
6.4.6.1 The provisions of 6.4.6 shall apply to members with not exceeding four times the overall

member depth or regions of beams with concentrated loads within twice the member depth
from the support that are loaded on one face and supported on the opposite face so that
compression struts can develop between the loads and supports. See also 8.2.7.6.
6.4.6.2 Deep beams shall be designed using either nonlinear analysis as permitted in 6.3.7.1, or
Appendix A.
6.4.6.3 for deep beams shall not exceed 0.83 .
6.4.6.4 The area of shear reinforcement perpendicular to the flexural tension reinforcement, , shall

not be less than 0.0025 , and shall not exceed the smaller of /5 and 300 mm.
6.4.6.5 The area of shear reinforcement parallel to the flexural tension reinforcement, , shall not

be less than 0.0015 , and shall not exceed the smaller of /5 and 300 mm.
6.4.6.6 It shall be permitted to provide reinforcement satisfying A.3.3 instead of the minimum
horizontal and vertical reinforcement specified in 6.4.6.4 and 6.4.6.5.
6.4.7 Provisions for brackets and corbels
6.4.7.1 Brackets and corbels (Fig. 6.4.7.1 & Fig. 6.4.7.2) with a shear span‐to‐depth ratio ⁄ less

than 2 shall be permitted to be designed using Appendix A. Design shall be permitted using
6.4.7.3 and 6.4.7.4 for brackets and corbels with:
a) ⁄ not greater than 1, and
b) subject to factored horizontal tensile force, , not larger than .
The requirements of 6.4.7.2, 6.4.7.3.2.1, 6.4.7.3.2.2, 6.4.7.5, 6.4.7.6, and 6.4.7.7 shall apply to design of
brackets and corbels. Effective depth shall be determined at the face of the support.

Fig. 6.4.7.1—Structural action of a corbel
6‐50 Vol. 2
Chapter 1

Fig. 6.4.7.2—Notation used in Section 6.4.7
6.4.7.2 Depth at outside edge of bearing area shall not be less than 0.5 .
6.4.7.3 Section at face of support shall be designed to resist simultaneously , a factored moment
– , and a factored horizontal tensile force, .
6.4.7.3.1 In all design calculations in accordance with 6.4.7, φ shall be taken equal to 0.75.
6.4.7.3.2 Design of shear‐friction reinforcement, , to resist shall be in accordance with 6.4.5.

6.4.7.3.2.1 For normal weight concrete, shall not exceed the smallest of 0.2 , 3.3 0.08 ,
and 11 .
6.4.7.3.2.2 For all‐lightweight or sand‐lightweight concrete, shall not be taken greater than the smaller
of 0.2 – 0.07 / and 5.5 – 1.9 / .
6.4.7.3.3 Reinforcement to resist factored moment – shall be computed in
accordance with 6.3.2 and 6.3.3.
6.4.7.3.4 Reinforcement to resist factored tensile force shall be determined from .

Factored tensile force, , shall not be taken less than 0.2 unless provisions are made to
avoid tensile forces. shall be regarded as a live load even if tension results from restraint
of creep, shrinkage, or temperature change.
6.4.7.3.5 Area of primary tension reinforcement shall not be less than the larger of and

2 /3 .
6.4.7.4 Total area, , of closed stirrups or ties parallel to primary tension reinforcement shall not be

less than 0.5 – . Distribute uniformly within 2/3 adjacent to primary tension
reinforcement.
6.4.7.5 / shall not be less than 0.04 / .
6.4.7.6 At front face of bracket or corbel, primary tension reinforcement shall be anchored by one of
the following:
a) By a structural weld to a transverse bar of at least equal size; weld to be designed to
develop of primary tension reinforcement;
b) By bending primary tension reinforcement back to form a horizontal loop; or
c) By some other means of positive anchorage.
6.4.7.7
Bearing area on bracket or corbel shall not project beyond straight portion of primary tension
reinforcement, nor project beyond interior face of transverse anchor bar (if one is provided).

Part 6
Structural Design

6.4.8 Provisions for walls
6.4.8.1 Design of walls for shear forces perpendicular to face of wall shall be in accordance with
provisions for slabs in 6.4.10. Design for horizontal in‐plane shear forces in a wall shall be in
accordance with 6.4.8.2 through 6.4.8.9. Alternatively, it shall be permitted to design walls
with a height not exceeding two times the length of the wall for horizontal shear forces in
accordance with Appendix A and 6.4.8.9.2 through 6.4.8.9.5.
6.4.8.2 Design of horizontal section for shear in plane of wall shall be based on Eq. (6.4.1) and (6.4.2),
where shall be in accordance with 6.4.8.5 or 6.4.8.6 and shall be in accordance with
6.4.8.9.
6.4.8.3 at any horizontal section for shear in plane of wall shall not be taken greater than
,
0.83 , where is thickness of wall, and is defined in 6.4.8.4.
6.4.8.4 For design for horizontal shear forces in plane of wall, shall be taken equal to 0.8 . A larger

value of , equal to the distance from extreme compression fiber to center of force of all
reinforcement in tension, shall be permitted to be used when determined by a strain
compatibility analysis.
6.4.8.5 If a more detailed calculation is not made in accordance with 6.4.8.6, shall not be taken

greater than 0.17 for walls subject to axial compression, or shall not be taken
greater than the value given in 6.4.2.2.3 for walls subject to axial tension.
6.4.8.6 shall be permitted to be the lesser of the values computed from Eq. (6.4.22) and (6.4.23)
0.27λ 6.4.22
or
. λ .
0.05λ 6.4.23
where is the overall length of the wall, and is positive for compression and negative for

tension. If / – /2 is negative, Eq. (6.4.23) shall not apply.
6.4.8.7 Sections located closer to wall base than a distance /2 or one‐half the wall height,

whichever is less, shall be permitted to be designed for the same as that computed at a
distance /2 or one‐half the height.
6.4.8.8 Where is less than 0.5 , reinforcement shall be provided in accordance with 6.4.8.9 or in

accordance with Sec. 6.6. Where exceeds 0.5 , wall reinforcement for resisting shear
shall be provided in accordance with 6.4.8.9.
6.4.8.9 Design of shear reinforcement for walls
6.4.8.9.1 Where exceeds , horizontal shear reinforcement shall be provided to satisfy Eq. (6.4.1)

and (6.4.2), where shall be computed by
6.4.24
where is area of horizontal shear reinforcement within spacing , and is determined in accordance
with 6.4.8.4. Vertical shear reinforcement shall be provided in accordance with 6.4.8.9.4.
6‐52 Vol. 2
Chapter 1
6.4.8.9.2 Ratio of horizontal shear reinforcement area to gross concrete area of vertical section, shall

not be less than 0.0025.
6.4.8.9.3 Spacing of horizontal shear reinforcement shall not exceed the smallest of /5, 3 , and 450

mm, where is the overall length of the wall.
6.4.8.9.4 Ratio of vertical shear reinforcement area to gross concrete area of horizontal section, ρ
shall not be less than the larger of
0.0025 0.5 2.5 0.0025 6.4.25

and 0.0025, The value of ρ calculated by Eq. (6.4.25) need not be greater than required by 6.4.8.9.1.
In Eq. (6.4.25), is the overall length of the wall, and is the overall height of the wall.
6.4.8.9.5 Spacing of vertical shear reinforcement shall not exceed the smallest of /3, 3 , and 450

mm, where is the overall length of the wall.
6.4.9 Transfer of moments to columns
6.4.9.1 When gravity load, wind, earthquake, or other lateral forces cause transfer of moment at
connections of framing elements to columns, the shear resulting from moment transfer shall
be considered in the design of lateral reinforcement in the columns.
6.4.9.2 Except for connections not part of a primary seismic load‐resisting system that are restrained
on four sides by beams or slabs of approximately equal depth, connections shall have lateral
reinforcement not less than that required by Eq. (6.4.9) within the column for a depth not less
than that of the deepest connection of framing elements to the columns. See also Sec. 8.1.13.
6.4.10 Provisions for footings and slabs
6.4.10.1 The shear strength of footings and slabs in the vicinity of columns, concentrated loads, or
reactions is governed by the more severe of the following two conditions:
6.4.10.1.1 Beam action where each critical section to be investigated extends in a plane across the entire
width. The slab or footing shall be designed in accordance with 6.4.1 through 6.4.3 for beam
action.
6.4.10.1.2 For two‐way action, each of the critical sections to be investigated shall be located so that its
perimeter is a minimum but need not approach closer than /2 to:
a) Edges or corners of columns, concentrated loads, or reaction areas; and
b) Changes in slab thickness such as edges of capitals, drop panels, or shear caps.
For two‐way action, the slab or footing shall be designed in accordance with 6.4.10.2 through 6.4.10.6.
6.4.10.1.3 For square or rectangular columns, concentrated loads, or reaction areas, the critical sections
with four straight sides shall be permitted.
6.4.10.2 For two‐way action, the design of a slab or footing is based on Eq. (6.4.1) and (6.4.2). shall

be computed in accordance with 6.4.10.2.1, or 6.4.10.3.1. shall be computed in accordance
with 6.4.10.3. For slabs with shearheads, shall be in accordance with 6.4.10.4. Where
moment is transferred between a slab and a column, 6.4.10.6 shall apply.
6.4.10.2.1 For slabs and footings, shall be the smallest of (a), (b), and (c):

a) 0.17 1 λ (6.4.26)
where β is the ratio of long side to short side of the column, concentrated load or reaction area;

Part 6
Structural Design

b) 0.083 2 λ (6.4.27)
where is 40 for interior columns, 30 for edge columns, 20 for corner columns; and
c) 0.33λ (6.4.28)
6.4.10.3 Bars or wires and single‐ or multiple‐leg stirrups as shear reinforcement shall be permitted in
slabs and footings with greater than or equal to 150 mm, but not less than 16 times the
shear reinforcement bar diameter. Shear reinforcement shall be in accordance with 6.4.10.3.1
through 6.4.10.3.4.
6.4.10.3.1 For computing , Eq. (6.4.2) shall be used and shall not be taken greater than
0.17 , and shall be calculated in accordance with 6.4.3. In Eq. (6.4.10), shall be
taken as the cross‐sectional area of all legs of reinforcement on one peripheral line that is
geometrically similar to the perimeter of the column section.
6.4.10.3.2 shall not be taken greater than 0.5 .
6.4.10.3.3 The distance from the column face to the first line of stirrup legs that surround the column
shall not exceed /2. The spacing between adjacent stirrup legs in the first line of shear
reinforcement shall not exceed 2 measured in a direction parallel to the column face. The
spacing between successive lines of shear reinforcement that surround the column shall not
exceed /2 measured in a direction perpendicular to the column face. In a slab‐column
connection for which the moment transfer is negligible, the shear reinforcement should be
symmetrical about the centroid of the critical section (Fig. 6.4.10.1). Spacing limits defined
above are also shown in Fig. 6.4.10.1 for interior column and in Fig. 6.4.10.2 for edge column.
At edge columns or for interior connections where moment transfer is significant, closed
stirrups are recommended in a pattern as symmetrical as possible.
6.4.10.3.4 Slab shear reinforcement shall satisfy the anchorage requirements of 8.2.10 and shall engage
the longitudinal flexural reinforcement in the direction being considered.
6‐54 Vol. 2
Chapter 1
Critical section Critical section

through slab shear outside slab shear
reinforcement reinforcement
(first line of
stirrup legs)
d/2 d/2
Plan d/2
d/2
Slab d
Elevation < 2d < d/2 s < d/2
Column
Fig. 6.4.10.1‐ Arrangement of stirrup shear reinforcement around interior column (6.4.10.3.3).

Critical section outside
slab shear reinforcement
Slab
edge
d/2
D A
C B
Critical section through

slab shear reinforcement
d/2 (first line of stirrup legs)
Plan
< 2d < d/2 s < d/2
Elevation
Fig. 6.4.10.1‐ Arrangement of stirrup shear reinforcement around edge column (6.4.10.3.3).
6.4.10.4 Shear reinforcement consisting of structural steel I‐ or channel‐shaped sections (shearheads)
shall be permitted in slabs. The provisions of 6.4.10.4.1 through 6.4.10.4.9 shall apply where

Part 6
Structural Design

shear due to gravity load is transferred at interior column supports. Where moment is
transferred to columns, 6.4.10.7.3 shall apply.
6.4.10.4.1 Each shearhead shall consist of steel shapes fabricated by welding with a full penetration weld
into identical arms at right angles. Shearhead arms shall not be interrupted within the column
section.
6.4.10.4.2 A shearhead shall not be deeper than 70 times the web thickness of the steel shape.
6.4.10.4.3 The ends of each shearhead arm shall be permitted to be cut at angles not less than 30
degrees with the horizontal, provided the plastic moment strength of the remaining tapered
section is adequate to resist the shear force attributed to that arm of the shearhead.
6.4.10.4.4 All compression flanges of steel shapes shall be located within 0.3 of compression surface of

slab.
6.4.10.4.5 The ratio between the flexural stiffness of each shearhead arm and that of the surrounding

composite cracked slab section of width shall not be less than 0.15.
6.4.10.4.6 Plastic moment strength, , required for each arm of the shearhead shall be computed by
6.4.29
where φ is for tension‐controlled members, is number of shearhead arms, and is minimum length of
each shearhead arm required to comply with requirements of 6.4.10.4.7 and 6.4.10.4.8.
6.4.10.4.7 The critical slab section for shear shall be perpendicular to the plane of the slab and shall cross
each shearhead arm at three‐quarters the distance – / from the column face to the
end of the shearhead arm. The critical section shall be located so that its perimeter is a
minimum, but need not be closer than the perimeter defined in 6.4.10.1.2(a).
6.4.10.4.8 shall not be taken larger than 0.33 on the critical section defined in 6.4.10.4.7.

When shearhead reinforcement is provided, shall not be taken greater than 0.58
on the critical section defined in 6.4.10.1.2(a).
6.4.10.4.9 Moment resistance contributed to each slab column strip by a shearhead shall not be

taken greater than
6.4.30
where φ is for tension‐controlled members, is number of shearhead arms, and is length of each
shearhead arm actually provided. However, shall not be taken larger than the smallest of:
a) 30 percent of the total factored moment required for each slab column strip;
b) The change in column strip moment over the length ;
c) computed by Eq. (6.4.29).
6.4.10.4.10 When unbalanced moments are considered, the shearhead must have adequate anchorage to
transmit to the column.
6.4.10.5 Headed shear stud reinforcement, placed perpendicular to the plane of a slab or footing, shall
be permitted in slabs and footings in accordance with 6.4.10.5.1 through 6.4.10.5.4. The
overall height of the shear stud assembly shall not be less than the thickness of the member
less the sum of: (1) the concrete cover on the top flexural reinforcement; (2) the concrete
cover on the base rail; and (3) one‐half the bar diameter of the tension flexural reinforcement.
6‐56 Vol. 2
Chapter 1
Where flexural tension reinforcement is at the bottom of the section, as in a footing, the
overall height of the shear stud assembly shall not be less than the thickness of the member
less the sum of: (1) the concrete cover on the bottom flexural reinforcement; (2) the concrete
cover on the head of the stud; and (3) one‐half the bar diameter of the bottom flexural
reinforcement.
6.4.10.5.1 For the critical section defined in 6.4.10.1.2, shall be computed using Eq. (6.4.2), with

and not exceeding 0.25 and 0.66 , respectively. shall be calculated
using Eq. (6.4.10) with equal to the cross‐sectional area of all the shear reinforcement on
one peripheral line that is approximately parallel to the perimeter of the column section,
where is the spacing of the peripheral lines of headed shear stud reinforcement. /
shall not be less than 0.17 .
6.4.10.5.2 The spacing between the column face and the first peripheral line of shear reinforcement shall
not exceed /2. The spacing between peripheral lines of shear reinforcement, measured in a
direction perpendicular to any face of the column, shall be constant. For all slabs and footings,
the spacing shall be based on the value of the shear stress due to factored shear force and
unbalanced moment at the critical section defined in 6.4.10.1.2, and shall not exceed:
a) 0.75 where maximum shear stresses due to factored loads are less than or equal to
0.5 ; and
b) 0.5 where maximum shear stresses due to factored loads are greater than 0.5 .
6.4.10.5.3 The spacing between adjacent shear reinforcement elements, measured on the perimeter of
the first peripheral line of shear reinforcement, shall not exceed 2 .
6.4.10.5.4 Shear stress due to factored shear force and moment shall not exceed 0.17 at the

critical section located /2 outside the outermost peripheral line of shear reinforcement.
6.4.10.6 Openings in slabs
If openings in slabs are located at a distance less than 10 times the slab thickness from a concentrated
load or reaction area, or when openings in flat slabs are located within column strips as defined in Sec. 6.5,
the critical slab sections for shear defined in 6.4.10.1.2 and 6.4.10.4.7 shall be modified as follows:

Part 6
Structural Design

6.4.10.6.1 For slabs without shearheads, that part of the perimeter of the critical section that is enclosed
by straight lines projecting from the centroid of the column, concentrated load, or reaction
area and tangent to the boundaries of the openings shall be considered ineffective (Fig.
6.4.10.3).
6.4.10.6.2 For slabs with shearheads, the ineffective portion of the perimeter shall be one‐half of that
defined in 6.4.10.6.1.
Ineffective Opening
d (Typ.)
2
Critical
Section
(a) (b)
Free corner
Regard
as free
edge
(C) (d)

Fig. 6.4.10.3 – Effective perimeter (in dashed lines) to consider effect of openings and free edges
(6.4.10.6.1).
6.4.10.7 Transfer of moment in slab‐column connections
6.4.10.7.1 Where gravity load, wind, earthquake, or other lateral forces cause transfer of unbalanced
moment between a slab and column, shall be transferred by flexure in accordance
with 6.5.5.3. The remainder of the unbalanced moment, , shall be considered to be
transferred by eccentricity of shear about the centroid of the critical section defined in
6.4.10.1.2 where
1 6.4.31
6.4.10.7.2 The shear stress resulting from moment transfer by eccentricity of shear shall be assumed to
vary linearly about the centroid of the critical sections defined in 6.4.10.1.2. The maximum
shear stress due to and shall not exceed :
(a) For members without shear reinforcement,
/ 6.4.32
where is as defined in 6.4.10.2.1.
6‐58 Vol. 2
Chapter 1
(b) For members with shear reinforcement other than shearheads,
/ 6.4.33
where and are defined in 6.4.10.3.1. The design shall take into account the variation of shear stress
around the column. The shear stress due to factored shear force and moment shall not exceed
0.17 at the critical section located /2 outside the outermost line of stirrup legs that surround
the column.

The maximum factored shear stress may be obtained from the combined shear stresses on the left and right
faces of the column (Fig. 6.4.10.4),

Where, = area of concrete of assumed critical section =2 2
, distances from centroid of critical section to left and right face of section respectively
, = width and depth of the column
= property of assumed critical section analogous to polar moment of inertia
For an interior column, the quantity is

2 ))

Part 6
Structural Design

Vu
T
Mu c d
(a)
b1 = c1 + d Vl
c1 Vr
b 2 = c2 + d c2
cl cr
cl cr
(b) (C)
d
b1 = c1 + 2
c1 Vl
Vr
b 2 = c2 + d c2
cl cr
cl cr
(d) (e)
Fig. 6.4.10.4 – Transfer of moment from slab to column: (a) forces resulting from vertical load and
unbalanced moment; (b) critical section for an interior column; (c) shear stress distribution for
an interior column; (d) critical section for an edge column; (e) shear stress distribution for an
edge column (6.4.10.7.2).
6‐60 Vol. 2
Chapter 1
6.4.10.7.3 When shear reinforcement consisting of structural steel I‐ or channel‐shaped sections
(shearheads) is provided, the sum of the shear stresses due to vertical load acting on the
critical section defined by 6.4.10.4.7 and the shear stresses resulting from moment
transferred by eccentricity of shear about the centroid of the critical section defined in
6.4.10.1.2(a) and 6.4.10.1.3 shall not exceed 0.33 .
6.5 TWOWAY SLAB SYSTEMS: FLAT PLATES, FLAT SLABS AND EDGE
SUPPORTED SLABS
6.5.1 Scope
The provisions of this section shall apply to all slabs, solid, ribbed or hollow, spanning in more than one
direction, with or without beams between the supports. Flat plate is a term normally attributed to slabs
without beams and without drop panels, column capitals, or brackets. On the other hand, slabs without
beams, but with drop panels, column capital or brackets are commonly known as flat slabs. While this
section covers the requirements for all types of slabs, the provisions of 6.5.8, Alternative Design of Two‐
way Edge‐Supported slabs, may be used as an alternative for slabs supported on all four edges by walls,
steel beams or monolithic concrete beams having a total depth not less than 3 times the slab thickness.
6.5.1.1 For a slab system supported by columns or walls, dimensions , , and shall be based on

an effective support area defined by the intersection of the bottom surface of the slab, or of
the drop panel or shear cap if present, with the largest right circular cone, right pyramid, or
tapered wedge whose surfaces are located within the column and the capital or bracket and
are oriented no greater than 45 degrees to the axis of the column.
6.5.1.2 Minimum thickness of slabs designed in accordance with Sec. 6.5 shall be as required by
6.2.5.3.
6.5.2 General
6.5.2.1 Column strip is a design strip with a width on each side of a column centerline equal to 0.25
or 0.25 , whichever is less. Column strip includes beams, if any.
6.5.2.2 Middle strip is a design strip bounded by two column strips.
6.5.2.3 A panel is bounded by column, beam, or wall centerlines on all sides.
6.5.2.4 For monolithic or fully composite construction, a beam includes that portion of slab on each
side of the beam extending a distance equal to the projection of the beam above or below the
slab, whichever is greater, but not greater than four times the slab thickness (Fig. 6.5.2.1).
6.5.2.5 When used to reduce the amount of negative moment reinforcement over a column or
minimum
required slab thickness, a drop panel shall:
a) project below the slab at least one‐quarter of the adjacent slab thickness; and
b) extend in each direction from the centerline of support a distance not less than one‐sixth
the span length measured from center‐to‐center of supports in that direction.
6.5.2.6 When used to increase the critical condition section for shear at a slab‐column joint, a shear
cap shall project below the slab and extend a minimum horizontal distance from the face of
the column that is equal to the thickness of the projection below the slab soffit.

Part 6
Structural Design

hb < 4hf
hf bw + 2hb < bw + 8hf
hb hb
bw bw

Fig. 6.5.2.1 – Portion of slab to be included with the beam according to 6.5.2.4.
6.5.3 Slab reinforcement
6.5.3.1 Area of reinforcement in each direction for two‐way slab systems shall be determined from
moments at critical sections, but shall not be less than required by Sec. 8.1.11.2.
6.5.3.2 Spacing of reinforcement at critical sections shall not exceed two times the slab thickness,
except for portions of slab area of cellular or ribbed construction. In the slab over cellular
spaces, reinforcement shall be provided as required by Sec. 8.1.11.
6.5.3.3 Positive moment reinforcement perpendicular to a discontinuous edge shall extend to the
edge of slab and have embedment, straight or hooked, at least 150 mm in spandrel beams,
columns, or walls.
6.5.3.4 Negative moment reinforcement perpendicular to a discontinuous edge shall be bent,
hooked, or otherwise anchored in spandrel beams, columns, or walls, and shall be developed
at face of support according to provisions of Sec. 8.2.
6.5.3.5 Where a slab is not supported by a spandrel beam or wall at a discontinuous edge, or where a
slab cantilevers beyond the support, anchorage of reinforcement shall be permitted within
the slab.
6.5.3.6 At exterior corners of slabs supported by edge walls or where one or more edge beams have a
value of greater than 1.0, top and bottom slab reinforcement shall be provided at exterior
corners in accordance with 6.5.3.6.1 through 6.5.3.6.4and as shown in Fig. 6.5.3.1.
6‐62 Vol. 2
Chapter 1
L Long
(L Long )/5
B-1
(LLong )/5
As top per 6.5.3.6
LShort
As bottom per 6.5.3.6
B-2
Choice-1
L Long
(L Long )/5
B-1
(LLong )/5
LShort
As per 6.5.3.6
top and bottom
B-2
Choice-2
Notes:
1. Applies if B-1or B-2 has αf >1.0

2. Max. bar spacing 2h, where h = slab thickness
3. Reinforcement same as maximum +ve reinforcement of the panel
Fig. 6.5.3.1— Corner reinforcement in slabs (6.5.3.6)
6.5.3.6.1 Corner reinforcement in both top and bottom of slab shall be sufficient to resist a moment per
unit of width equal to the maximum positive moment per unit width in the slab panel.

Part 6
Structural Design

6.5.3.6.2 The moment shall be assumed to be about an axis perpendicular to the diagonal from the
corner in the top of the slab and about an axis parallel to the diagonal from the corner in the
bottom of the slab.
6.5.3.6.3 Corner reinforcement shall be provided for a distance in each direction from the corner equal
to one‐fifth the longer span.
6.5.3.6.4 Corner reinforcement shall be placed parallel to the diagonal in the top of the slab and
perpendicular to the diagonal in the bottom of the slab. Alternatively, reinforcement shall be
placed in two layers parallel to the sides of the slab in both the top and bottom of the slab.
6.5.3.7 When a drop panel is used to reduce the amount of negative moment reinforcement over the
column of a flat slab, the dimensions of the drop panel shall be in accordance with 6.5.2.5. In
computing required slab reinforcement, the thickness of the drop panel below the slab shall
not be assumed to be greater than one‐quarter the distance from the edge of drop panel to
the face of column or column capital.
6.5.3.8 Details of reinforcement in slabs without beams
6.5.3.8.1 In addition to the other requirements of 6.5.3, reinforcement in slabs without beams shall
have minimum extensions as prescribed in Fig. 6.5.3.2.
6.5.3.8.2 Where adjacent spans are unequal, extensions of negative moment reinforcement beyond the
face of support as prescribed in Fig. 6.5.3.2 shall be based on requirements of the longer span.
Fig. 6.5.3.2—Minimum extensions for reinforcement in slabs without beams. (See 8.2.8.1 for reinforcement
extension into supports
6‐64 Vol. 2
Chapter 1
6.5.3.8.3 Bent bars shall be permitted only when depth‐span ratio permits use of bends of 45 degrees
or less.
6.5.3.8.4 In frames where two‐way slabs act as primary members resisting lateral loads, lengths of
reinforcement shall be determined by analysis but shall not be less than those prescribed in
Fig. 6.5.3.2.
6.5.3.8.5 All bottom bars or wires within the column strip, in each direction, shall be continuous or
spliced with Class B tension splices or with mechanical or welded splices satisfying Sec.
8.2.12.3. Splices shall be located as shown in Fig. 6.5.3.2. At least two of the column strip
bottom bars or wires in each direction shall pass within the region bounded by the
longitudinal reinforcement of the column and shall be anchored at exterior supports.
6.5.3.8.6 In slabs with shearheads and in lift‐slab construction where it is not practical to pass the
bottom bars required by 6.5.3.8.5 through the column, at least two bonded bottom bars or
wires in each direction shall pass through the shearhead or lifting collar as close to the column
as practicable and be continuous or spliced with a Class A splice. At exterior columns, the
reinforcement shall be anchored at the shearhead or lifting collar.
6.5.4 Openings in slab systems
6.5.4.1 Openings of any size shall be permitted in slab systems if shown by analysis that the design
strength is at least equal to the required strength set forth in 6.2.2 and 6.2.3, and that all
serviceability conditions, including the limits on deflections, are met.
6.5.4.2 As an alternate to analysis as required by 6.5.4.1, openings shall be permitted in slab systems
without beams only, in accordance with 6.5.4.2.1 through 6.5.4.2.4.
6.5.4.2.1 Openings of any size shall be permitted in the area common to intersecting middle strips,
provided total amount of reinforcement required for the panel without the opening is
maintained.
6.5.4.2.2 In the area common to intersecting column strips, not more than one‐eighth the width of
column strip in either span shall be interrupted by openings. An amount of reinforcement
equivalent to that interrupted by an opening shall be added on the sides of the opening.
6.5.4.2.3 In the area common to one column strip and one middle strip, not more than one‐quarter of
the reinforcement in either strip shall be interrupted by openings. An amount of
reinforcement equivalent to that interrupted by an opening shall be added on the sides of the
opening.
6.5.4.2.4 Shear requirements of 6.4.10.6 shall be satisfied.
6.5.5 Design procedures
6.5.5.1 A slab system shall be designed by any procedure satisfying conditions of equilibrium and
geometric compatibility, if shown that the design strength at every section is at least equal to
the required strength set forth in 6.2.2 and 6.2.3, and that all serviceability conditions,
including limits on deflections, are met.
6.5.5.1.1 Design of a slab system for gravity loads, including the slab and beams (if any) between
supports and supporting columns or walls forming orthogonal frames, by either the Direct
Design Method of 6.5.6 or the Equivalent Frame Method of 6.5.7, shall be permitted.

Part 6
Structural Design

6.5.5.1.2 For lateral loads, analysis of frames shall take into account effects of cracking and
reinforcement on stiffness of frame members.
6.5.5.1.3 Combining the results of the gravity load analysis with the results of the lateral load analysis
shall be permitted.
6.5.5.2 The slab and beams (if any) between supports shall be proportioned for factored moments
prevailing at every section.
6.5.5.3 When gravity load, wind, earthquake, or other lateral forces cause transfer of moment
between slab and column, a fraction of the unbalanced moment shall be transferred by
flexure in accordance with 6.5.5.3.2 through 6.5.5.3.4.
6.5.5.3.1 The fraction of unbalanced moment not transferred by flexure shall be transferred by
eccentricity of shear in accordance with 6.4.10.7.
6.5.5.3.2 A fraction of the unbalanced moment given by shall be considered to be transferred by

flexure within an effective slab width between lines that are one and one‐half slab or drop
panel thickness 1.5 outside opposite faces of the column or capital, where is the
factored moment to be transferred and
6.5.1
⁄ ⁄
6.5.5.3.3 For slabs with unbalanced moments transferred between the slab and columns, it shall be
permitted to increase the value of given by Eq. (6.5.1) in accordance with the following:
a) For edge columns with unbalanced moments about an axis parallel to the edge,
1.0 provided that at an edge support does not exceed 0.75 , or at a corner
support does not exceed 0.5 .
b) For unbalanced moments at interior supports, and for edge columns with unbalanced
moments about an axis perpendicular to the edge, increase to as much as 1.25 times
the value from Eq. (6.5.1), but not more than 1.0, provided that at the support
does not exceed 0.4 . The net tensile strain calculated for the effective slab width
defined in 6.5.5.3.2 shall not be less than 0.010.
The value of in items (a) and (b) shall be calculated in accordance with 6.4.10.2.1.
6.5.5.3.4 Concentration of reinforcement over the column by closer spacing or additional
reinforcement shall be used to resist moment on the effective slab width defined in 6.5.5.3.2.
6.5.5.4 Design for transfer of load from slabs to supporting columns or walls through shear and
torsion shall be in accordance with Sec. 6.4.
6.5.6 Direct design method
6.5.6.1 Limitations
Design of slab systems within the limitations of 6.5.6.1.1 through 6.5.6.1.8 by the direct design method
shall be permitted.
6‐66 Vol. 2
Chapter 1
6.5.6.1.1 There shall be a minimum of three continuous spans in each direction.
6.5.6.1.2 Panels shall be rectangular, with a ratio of longer to shorter span center‐to‐center of supports
within a panel not greater than 2.
6.5.6.1.3 Successive span lengths center‐to‐center of supports in each direction shall not differ by more
than one‐third the longer span.
6.5.6.1.4 Offset of columns by a maximum of 10 percent of the span (in direction of offset) from either
axis between centerlines of successive columns shall be permitted.
6.5.6.1.5 All loads shall be due to gravity only and uniformly distributed over an entire panel. The
unfactored live load shall not exceed two times the unfactored dead load.
6.5.6.1.6 For a panel with beams between supports on all sides, Eq. (6.5.2) shall be satisfied for beams
in the two perpendicular directions
ℓ
0.2 5.0 6.5.2
ℓ
where
and are calculated in accordance with Eq. (6.5.3).

6.5.3
6.5.6.1.7 Moment redistribution as permitted by 8.4 shall not be applied for slab systems designed by
the direct design method. See 6.5.6.7.
6.5.6.1.8 Variations from the limitations of 6.5.6.1 shall be permitted if demonstrated by analysis that
requirements of 6.5.5.1 are satisfied.
6.5.6.2 Total factored static moment for a span
6.5.6.2.1 Total factored static moment, , for a span shall be determined in a strip bounded laterally

by centerline of panel on each side of centerline of supports.
6.5.6.2.2 Absolute sum of positive and average negative factored moments in each direction shall not
be less than
ℓ ℓ
6.5.4
where is length of clear span in direction that moments are being determined.

Part 6
Structural Design

6.5.6.2.3 Where the transverse span of panels on either side of the centerline of supports varies, in
Eq. (6.5.4) shall be taken as the average of adjacent transverse spans.
6.5.6.2.4 When the span adjacent and parallel to an edge is being considered, the distance from edge
to panel centerline shall be substituted for in Eq. (6.5.4).
6.5.6.2.5 Clear span shall extend from face to face of columns, capitals, brackets, or walls. Value of

used in Eq. (6.5.4) shall not be less than 0.65 . Circular or regular polygon‐shaped supports
shall be treated as square supports with the same area.
6.5.6.3 Negative and positive factored moments
6.5.6.3.1 Negative factored moments shall be located at face of rectangular supports. Circular or
regular polygon‐shaped supports shall be treated as square supports with the same area.
6.5.6.3.2 In an interior span, total static moment, , shall be distributed as follows:

Negative factored moment 0.65
Positive factored moment 0.35
6.5.6.3.3 In an end span, total factored static moment, , shall be distributed as in Table 6.5.6.1

below:
Table 6.5.6.1 Distribution of Total Factored Static Moment, in an End Span
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)

Exterior Slab with Slab without beams between Exterior edge
edge beams interior supports fully restrained
unrestrained between all Without edge With edge
supports beam beam
Interior negative 0.75 0.70 0.70 0.70 0.65
factored moment
Positive factored 0.63 0.57 0.52 0.50 0.35
moment
Exterior negative 0 0.16 0.26 0.30 0.65
factored moment
6.5.6.3.4 Negative moment sections shall be designed to resist the larger of the two interior negative
factored moments determined for spans framing into a common support unless an analysis is
made to distribute the unbalanced moment in accordance with stiffnesses of adjoining
elements.
6.5.6.3.5 Edge beams or edges of slab shall be proportioned to resist in torsion their share of exterior
negative factored moments.
6.5.6.3.6 The gravity load moment to be transferred between slab and edge column in accordance with
6.5.5.3.1 shall be 0.3 .
6.5.6.4 Factored moments in column strips
6.5.6.4.1 Column strips shall be proportioned to resist the portions in percent of interior negative
factored moments as shown in Table 6.5.6.2 below:
Table 6.5.6.2 Portions of Interior Negative Moments to be Resisted by Column Strip
6‐68 Vol. 2
Chapter 1
ℓ /ℓ 0.5 1.0 2.0

ℓ /ℓ 0 75 75 75
ℓ /ℓ 1 90 75 45
Note : Linear interpolations shall be made between values shown.
ℓ ℓ
Interpolation function for % of Moment = 75 30 ℓ 1
ℓ

6.5.6.4.2 Column strips shall be proportioned to resist the portions in percent of exterior negative
factored moments as shown in Table 6.5.6.3:
Table 6.5.6.3 Portions of Exterior Negative Moments to be Resisted by Column Strip
ℓ /ℓ 0.5 1.0 2.0

ℓ /ℓ = 0 100 100 100
0 ≥ 2.5 075 075 075
ℓ /ℓ = 0 100 100 100
1 ≥ 2.5 090 075 045

Linear interpolations shall be made between values shown, where is calculated in Eq. (6.5.5) and is
calculated in Eq. (6.5.6).
6.5.5
∑ 1 0.63 6.5.6
The constant for T‐ or L‐sections shall be permitted to be evaluated by dividing the section into separate
rectangular parts, as defined in 6.5.2.4, and summing the values of for each part.
ℓ ℓ
Interpolation function for % of Moment = 100 10 12 ℓ
1 ℓ

6.5.6.4.3 Where supports consist of columns or walls extending for a distance equal to or greater than
0.75 used to compute , negative moments shall be considered to be uniformly
distributed across .
6.5.6.4.4 Column strips shall be proportioned to resist the portions in percent of positive factored
moments shown in Table 6.5.6.4:
Table 6.5.6.4 Portions of Positive Moment to be Resisted by Column Strip
/ 0.5 1.0 2.0

/ 0 60 60 60
/ 1 90 75 45
Note : Linear interpolations shall be made between values shown.
ℓ ℓ
Interpolation function for % of Moment = 60 30 ℓ 1.5
ℓ


Part 6
Structural Design

6.5.6.4.5 For slabs with beams between supports, the slab portion of column strips shall be
proportioned to resist that portion of column strip moments not resisted by beams.
6.5.6.5 Factored moments in beams
6.5.6.5.1 Beams between supports shall be proportioned to resist 85 percent of column strip moments
if / is equal to or greater than 1.0.
6.5.6.5.2 For values of / between 1.0 and zero, proportion of column strip moments resisted by

beams shall be obtained by linear interpolation between 85 and zero percent.
6.5.6.5.3 In addition to moments calculated for uniform loads according to 6.5.6.2.2, 6.5.6.5.1, and
6.5.6.5.2, beams shall be proportioned to resist all moments caused by concentrated or linear
loads applied directly to beams, including weight of projecting beam stem above or below the
slab.
6.5.6.6 Factored moments in middle strips
6.5.6.6.1 That portion of negative and positive factored moments not resisted by column strips shall be
proportionately assigned to corresponding half middle strips.
6.5.6.6.2 Each middle strip shall be proportioned to resist the sum of the moments assigned to its two
half middle strips.
6.5.6.6.3 A middle strip adjacent to and parallel with a wall‐supported edge shall be proportioned to
resist twice the moment assigned to the half middle strip corresponding to the first row of
interior supports.
6.5.6.7 Modification of factored moments
Modification of negative and positive factored moments by 10 percent shall be permitted provided the
total static moment for a panel, , in the direction considered is not less than that required by Eq.
(6.5.4).
6.5.6.8 Factored shear in slab systems with beams
6.5.6.8.1 Beams with / equal to or greater than 1.0 shall be proportioned to resist shear caused

by factored loads on tributary areas which are bounded by 45‐degree lines drawn from the
corners of the panels and the centerlines of the adjacent panels parallel to the long sides (Fig.
6.5.6.1).
6.5.6.8.2 In proportioning beams with / less than 1.0 to resist shear, linear interpolation,
assuming beams carry no load at 0, shall be permitted.
6.5.6.8.3 In addition to shears calculated according to 6.5.6.8.1 and 6.5.6.8.2, beams shall be
proportioned to resist shears caused by factored loads applied directly on beams.
6.5.6.8.4 Computation of slab shear strength on the assumption that load is distributed to supporting
beams in accordance with 6.5.6.8.1 or 6.5.6.8.2 shall be permitted. Resistance to total shear
occurring on a panel shall be provided.
6.5.6.8.5 Shear strength shall satisfy the requirements of Sec. 6.4.
6‐70 Vol. 2
Chapter 1

Fig. 6.5.6.1—Tributary area for shear on an interior beam.
6.5.6.9 Factored moments in columns and walls
6.5.6.9.1 Columns and walls built integrally with a slab system shall resist moments caused by factored
loads on the slab system.
6.5.6.9.2 At an interior support, supporting elements above and below the slab shall resist the factored
moment specified by Eq. (6.5.7) in direct proportion to their stiffnesses unless a general
analysis is made.
0.07 0.5 ℓ ℓ ℓ ℓ
6.5.7
Where , , and refer to shorter span.
6.5.7 Equivalent frame method
6.5.7.1 Design of slab systems by the equivalent frame method shall be based on assumptions given
in 6.5.7.2 through 6.5.7.6, and all sections of slabs and supporting members shall be
proportioned for moments and shears thus obtained.
6.5.7.1.1 Where metal column capitals are used, it shall be permitted to take account of their
contributions to stiffness and resistance to moment and to shear.
6.5.7.1.2 It shall be permitted to neglect the change in length of columns and slabs due to direct stress,
and deflections due to shear.
6.5.7.2 Equivalent frame
6.5.7.2.1 The structure shall be considered to be made up of equivalent frames on column lines taken
longitudinally and transversely through the building (Fig. 6.5.7.1).

Part 6
Structural Design

Fig. 6.5.7.1—Definitions of equivalent frame.
6.5.7.2.2 Each frame shall consist of a row of columns or supports and slab‐beam strips, bounded
laterally by the centerline of panel on each side of the centerline of columns or supports.
6.5.7.2.3 Columns or supports shall be assumed to be attached to slab‐beam strips by torsional
members (see 6.5.7.5) transverse to the direction of the span for which moments are being
determined and extending to bounding lateral panel centerlines on each side of a column.
6.5.7.2.4 Frames adjacent and parallel to an edge shall be bounded by that edge and the centerline of
adjacent panel.
6.5.7.2.5 Analysis of each equivalent frame in its entirety shall be permitted. Alternatively, for gravity
loading, a separate analysis of each floor or roof with far ends of columns considered fixed
shall be permitted.
6.5.7.2.6 Where slab‐beams are analyzed separately, determination of moment at a given support
assuming that the slab‐beam is fixed at any support two panels distant therefrom, shall be
permitted, provided the slab continues beyond that point.
6.5.7.3 Slab‐beams
6.5.7.3.1 Determination of the moment of inertia of slab‐beams at any cross section outside of joints or
column capitals using the gross area of concrete shall be permitted.
6.5.7.3.2 Variation in moment of inertia along axis of slab‐beams shall be taken into account.
6.5.7.3.3 Moment of inertia of slab‐beams from center of column to face of column, bracket, or capital
shall be assumed equal to the moment of inertia of the slab‐beam at face of column, bracket,
or capital divided by the quantity 1 / , where and are measured transverse to
the direction of the span for which moments are being determined.
6‐72 Vol. 2
Chapter 1
6.5.7.4 Columns
6.5.7.4.1 Determination of the moment of inertia of columns at any cross section outside of joints or
column capitals using the gross area of concrete shall be permitted.
6.5.7.4.2 Variation in moment of inertia along axis of columns shall be taken into account (Fig. 6.5.7.2).
6.5.7.4.3 Moment of inertia of columns from top to bottom of the slab‐beam at a joint shall be
assumed to be infinite.
6.5.7.5 Torsional members
6.5.7.5.1 Torsional members (see 6.5.7.2.3) shall be assumed to have a constant cross section
throughout their length consisting of the largest of (a), (b), and (c):
a) A portion of slab having a width equal to that of the column, bracket, or capital in the
direction of the span for which moments are being determined;
b) For monolithic or fully composite construction, the portion of slab specified in (a) plus
that part of the transverse beam above and below the slab;
c) The transverse beam as defined in 6.5.2.4.
6.5.7.5.2 Where beams frame into columns in the direction of the span for which moments are being
determined, the torsional stiffness shall be multiplied by the ratio of the moment of inertia of
the slab with such a beam to the moment of inertia of the slab without such a beam.

Fig. 6.5.7.2—Equivalent column (column plus torsional members).
6.5.7.5.3 Stiffness of the torsional members shall be calculated by the following expression:

∑ 6.5.8
ℓ /ℓ
where and relate to the transverse span on each side of column.
6.5.7.6 Arrangement of live load
6.5.7.6.1 When the loading pattern is known, the equivalent frame shall be analyzed for that load.
6.5.7.6.2 When the unfactored live load is variable but does not exceed three‐quarters of the
unfactored dead load, or the nature of live load is such that all panels will be loaded

Part 6
Structural Design

simultaneously, it shall be permitted to assume that maximum factored moments occur at all
sections with full factored live load on entire slab system.
6.5.7.6.3 For loading conditions other than those defined in 6.5.7.6.2, it shall be permitted to assume
that maximum positive factored moment near midspan of a panel occurs with three‐quarters
of the full factored live load on the panel and on alternate panels; and it shall be permitted to
assume that maximum negative factored moment in the slab at a support occurs with three‐
quarters of the full factored live load on adjacent panels only.
6.5.7.6.4 Factored moments shall be taken not less than those occurring with full factored live load on
all panels.
6.5.7.7 Factored moments
6.5.7.7.1 At interior supports, the critical section for negative factored moment (in both column and
middle strips) shall be taken at face of rectilinear supports, but not farther away than 0.175
from the center of a column.
6.5.7.7.2 At exterior supports with brackets or capitals, the critical section for negative factored
moment in the span perpendicular to an edge shall be taken at a distance from face of
supporting element not greater than one‐half the projection of bracket or capital beyond face
of supporting element.
6.5.7.7.3 Circular or regular polygon‐shaped supports shall be treated as square supports with the same
area for location of critical section for negative design moment.
6.5.7.7.4 Where slab systems within limitations of 6.5.6.1 are analyzed by the equivalent frame
method, it shall be permitted to reduce the resulting computed moments in such proportion
that the absolute sum of the positive and average negative moments used in design need not
exceed the value obtained from Eq. (6.5.4).
6.5.7.7.5 Distribution of moments at critical sections across the slab‐beam strip of each frame to
column strips, beams, and middle strips as provided in 6.5.6.4, 6.5.6.5, and 6.5.6.6 shall be
permitted if the requirement of 6.5.6.1.6 is satisfied.
6.5.8 ALTERNATIVE DESIGN OF TWOWAY EDGESUPPORTED SLABS
6.5.8.1 Notation
The notations provided below are applicable for Section 6.5.8 only. Also see Section 6.1.1.1 for other
notations.

, = Moment coefficients
= Length of clear span in short direction
= Length of clear span in long direction
= Moment in the short direction
= Moment in the long direction
= Uniform load
= Length of clear span in direction that moment are being determined
= Length of clear span transverse to
= Ratio of flexural stiffness of beam section to flexural stiffness of a width of slab bounded
laterally by centre line of adjacent panels (if any) on each side of the beam. See 6.4.2.1
= in the direction of .
6‐74 Vol. 2
Chapter 1
6.5.8.2 Scope and Limitations
6.5.8.2.1 The provisions of this section may be used as alternative to those of 6.5.1 through 6.5.7 for
two‐way slabs supported on all four edges by walls, steel beams or monolithic concrete
beams having a total depth not less than 3 times the slab thickness.
6.5.8.2.2 Panels shall be rectangular with a ratio of longer to shorter span centre to centre of supports
not greater than 2.
6.5.8.2.3 The value of ℓ /ℓ shall be greater than or equal to 1.
6.5.8.3 Analysis by the Coefficient Method
6.5.8.3.1 The negative moments and dead load and live load positive moments in the two directions
shall be computed from Tables 6.5.8.1, 6.5.8.2 and 6.5.8.3 respectively. Shear in the slab and
loads on the supporting beams shall be computed from Table 6.5.8.4.
6.5.8.4 Shear on Supporting Beam
The shear requirements provided in 6.5.6.8 shall be satisfied.
6.5.8.5 Deflection
Thickness of slabs supported on walls or stiff beams on all sides shall satisfy the requirements of 6.2.5.3.
Table 6.5.8.1 Coefficients for Negative Moments in Slabs †
, ,
, , where = total uniform dead plus live load per unit area
Ratio Case 1 Case 2 Case 3 Case 4 Case 5 Case 6 Case 7 Case 8 Case 9

, 0.045 0.050 0.075 0.071 0.033 0.061
1.00
, 0.045 0.076 0.050 0.071 0.061 0.033
, 0.050 0.055 0.079 0.075 0.038 0.065
0.95
, 0.041 0.072 0.045 0.067 0.056 0.029
, 0.055 0.060 0.080 0.079 0.043 0.068
0.90
, 0.037 0.070 0.040 0.062 0.052 0.025
, 0.060 0.066 0.082 0.083 0.049 0.072
0.85
, 0.031 0.065 0.034 0.057 0.046 0.021
, 0.065 0.071 0.083 0.086 0.055 0.075
0.80
, 0.027 0.061 0.029 0.051 0.041 0.017
, 0.069 0.076 0.085 0.088 0.061 0.078
0.75
, 0.022 0.056 0.024 0.044 0.036 0.014

Part 6
Structural Design

, 0.074 0.081 0.086 0.091 0.068 0.081

0.70
, 0.017 0.050 0.019 0.038 0.029 0.011
, 0.077 0.085 0.087 0.093 0.074 0.083
0.65
, 0.014 0.043 0.015 0.031 0.024 0.008
, 0.081 0.089 0.088 0.095 0.080 0.085
0.60
, 0.010 0.035 0.011 0.024 0.018 0.006
, 0.084 0.092 0.089 0.096 0.085 0.086
0.55
, 0.007 0.028 0.008 0.019 0.014 0.005
, 0.086 0.094 0.090 0.097 0.089 0.088
0.50
, 0.006 0.022 0.006 0.014 0.010 0.003
† A crosshatched edge indicates that the slab continues across, or is fixed at the support;
an unmarked edge indicates a support at which torsional resistance is negligible.
Table 6.5.8.2 Coefficients for Dead Load Positive Moments in Slabs †
, , ,
, , ,
where = uniform dead load per unit area

, 0.036 0.018 0.018 0.027 0.027 0.033 0.027 0.020 0.023
1.00
, 0.036 0.018 0.027 0.027 0.018 0.027 0.033 0.023 0.020
, 0.040 0.020 0.021 0.030 0.028 0.036 0.031 0.022 0.024
0.95
, 0.033 0.016 0.025 0.024 0.015 0.024 0.031 0.021 0.017
, 0.045 0.022 0.025 0.033 0.029 0.039 0.035 0.025 0.026
0.90
, 0.029 0.014 0.024 0.022 0.013 0.021 0.028 0.019 0.015
, 0.050 0.024 0.029 0.036 0.031 0.042 0.040 0.029 0.028
0.85
, 0.026 0.012 0.022 0.019 0.011 0.017 0.025 0.017 0.013
, 0.056 0.026 0.034 0.039 0.032 0.045 0.045 0.032 0.029
0.80
, 0.023 0.011 0.020 0.016 0.009 0.015 0.022 0.015 0.010
, 0.061 0.028 0.040 0.043 0.033 0.048 0.051 0.036 0.031
0.75
, 0.019 0.009 0.018 0.013 0.007 0.012 0.020 0.013 0.007
, 0.068 0.030 0.046 0.046 0.035 0.051 0.058 0.040 0.033
0.70
, 0.016 0.007 0.016 0.011 0.005 0.009 0.017 0.011 0.006
6‐76 Vol. 2
Chapter 1

, 0.074 0.032 0.054 0.050 0.036 0.054 0.065 0.044 0.034
0.65
, 0.013 0.006 0.014 0.009 0.004 0.007 0.014 0.009 0.005
, 0.081 0.034 0.062 0.053 0.037 0.056 0.073 0.048 0.036
0.60
, 0.010 0.004 0.011 0.007 0.003 0.006 0.012 0.007 0.004
, 0.088 0.035 0.071 0.056 0.038 0.058 0.081 0.052 0.037
0.55
, 0.008 0.003 0.009 0.005 0.002 0.004 0.009 0.005 0.003
, 0.095 0.037 0.080 0.059 0.039 0.061 0.089 0.056 0.038
0.50
, 0.006 0.002 0.007 0.004 0.001 0.003 0.007 0.004 0.002

Table 6.5.8.3 Coefficients for Live Load Positive Moments in Slabs †

, , ,
, , , where w = uniform live load per unit area

, 0.036 0.027 0.027 0.032 0.032 0.035 0.032 0.028 0.030
1.00
, 0.036 0.027 0.032 0.032 0.027 0.032 0.035 0.030 0.028
, 0.040 0.030 0.031 0.035 0.034 0.038 0.036 0.031 0.032
0.95
, 0.033 0.025 0.029 0.029 0.024 0.029 0.032 0.027 0.025
, 0.045 0.034 0.035 0.039 0.037 0.042 0.040 0.035 0.036
0.90
, 0.029 0.022 0.027 0.026 0.021 0.025 0.029 0.024 0.022
, 0.050 0.037 0.040 0.043 0.041 0.046 0.045 0.040 0.039
0.85
, 0.026 0.019 0.024 0.023 0.019 0.022 0.026 0.022 0.020
, 0.056 0.041 0.045 0.048 0.044 0.051 0.051 0.044 0.042
0.80
, 0.023 0.017 0.022 0.020 0.016 0.019 0.023 0.019 0.017
, 0.061 0.045 0.051 0.052 0.047 0.055 0.056 0.049 0.046
0.75
, 0.019 0.014 0.019 0.016 0.013 0.016 0.020 0.016 0.013
, 0.068 0.049 0.057 0.057 0.051 0.060 0.063 0.054 0.050
0.70
, 0.016 0.012 0.016 0.014 0.011 0.013 0.017 0.014 0.011
, 0.074 0.053 0.064 0.062 0.055 0.064 0.070 0.059 0.054
0.65
, 0.013 0.010 0.014 0.011 0.009 0.010 0.014 0.011 0.009

Part 6
Structural Design

, 0.081 0.058 0.071 0.067 0.059 0.068 0.077 0.065 0.059

0.60
, 0.010 0.007 0.011 0.009 0.007 0.008 0.011 0.009 0.007
, 0.088 0.062 0.080 0.072 0.063 0.073 0.085 0.070 00.063
0.55
, 0.008 0.006 0.009 0.007 0.005 0.006 0.009 0.007 0.006
, 0.095 0.066 0.088 0.077 0.067 0.078 0.092 0.076 0.067
0.50
, 0.006 0.004 0.007 0.005 0.004 0.005 0.007 0.005 0.004
6.5.8.6 Reinforcement
6.5.8.6.1 Area of reinforcement in each direction shall be determined from moments at critical sections
but shall not be less than that required by 8.1.11.
6.5.8.6.2 Spacing of reinforcement at critical sections shall not exceed two times the slab thickness,
except for portions of slab area that may be of cellular or ribbed construction. In the slab over
cellular spaces, reinforcement shall be provided as required by 8.1.11.
6.5.8.6.3 Positive moment reinforcement perpendicular to a discontinuous edge shall extend to the
edge of slab and have embedment, straight or hooked, at least 150 mm in spandrel beams,
columns, or walls.
Table 6.5.8.4 Ratio of Total Load w in and Directions ( and ) for Shear in Slab and Load on
Supports †

0.50 0.50 0.17 0.50 0.83 0.71 0.29 0.33 0.67
1.00
0.50 0.50 0.83 0.50 0.17 0.29 0.71 0.67 0.33

0.55 0.55 0.20 0.55 0.86 0.75 0.33 0.38 0.71
0.95
0.45 0.45 0.80 0.45 0.14 0.25 0.67 0.62 0.29

0.60 0.60 0.23 0.60 0.88 0.79 0.38 0.43 0.75
0.90
0.40 0.40 0.77 0.40 0.12 0.21 0.62 0.57 0.25

0.66 0.66 0.28 0.66 0.90 0.83 0.43 0.49 0.79
0.85
0.34 0.34 0.72 0.34 0.10 0.17 0.57 0.51 0.21

6‐78 Vol. 2
Chapter 1
0.71 0.71 0.33 0.71 0.92 0.86 0.49 0.55 0.83

0.80
0.29 0.29 0.67 0.29 0.08 0.14 0.51 0.45 0.17

0.76 0.76 0.39 0.76 0.94 0.88 0.56 0.61 0.86
0.75
0.24 0.24 0.61 0.24 0.06 0.12 0.44 0.39 0.14

0.81 0.81 0.45 0.81 0.95 0.91 0.62 0.68 0.89
0.70
0.19 0.19 0.55 0.19 0.05 0.09 0.38 0.32 0.11

0.85 0.85 0.53 0.85 0.96 0.93 0.69 0.74 0.92
0.65
0.15 0.15 0.47 0.15 0.04 0.07 0.31 0.26 0.08

0.89 0.89 0.61 0.89 0.97 0.95 0.76 0.80 0.94
0.60
0.11 0.11 0.39 0.11 0.03 0.05 0.24 0.20 0.06

0.92 0.92 0.69 0.92 0.98 0.96 0.81 0.85 0.95
0.55
0.08 0.08 0.31 0.08 0.02 0.04 0.19 0.15 0.05

0.94 0.94 0.76 0.94 0.99 0.97 0.86 0.89 0.97
0.50
0.06 0.06 0.24 0.06 0.01 0.03 0.14 0.11 0.03

6.5.8.6.4 Negative moment reinforcement perpendicular to a discontinuous edge shall be bent,
hooked, or otherwise anchored, in spandrel beams, columns, or walls, and shall be developed
at face of support according to provisions of Sec 8.2.
6.5.8.6.5 Corner Reinforcement
a) Corner reinforcement shall be provided at exterior corners in both bottom and top of the
slab, for a distance in each direction from the corner equal to one‐fifth the longer span of
the corner panel as per provisions of 6.5.3.6.
6.5.9 RIBBED AND HOLLOW SLABS
6.5.9.1 General
The provisions of this section shall apply to slabs constructed in one of the ways described below:
a) As a series of concrete ribs with topping cast on forms which may be removed after the
concrete has set;
b) As a series of concrete ribs between precast blocks which remain part of the completed
structure; the top of the ribs may be connected by a topping of concrete of the same
strength as that used in the ribs; and
c) Slabs with a continuous top and bottom face but containing voids of rectangular, oval or
other shape.

Part 6
Structural Design

6.5.9.2 Analysis and Design
Any method of analysis which satisfies equilibrium and compatibility requirements may be used for ribbed
and hollow slabs. Approximate moments and shears in continuous one‐way ribbed or hollow slabs may be
obtained from 6.1.4.3. For two‐way slabs, the unified design approach specified in Sec 6.5 Flat Plates, Flat
Slabs and Edge‐supported Slabs, shall be used.
6.5.9.3 Shear
6.5.9.3.1 When burnt tile or concrete tile fillers of material having the same strength as the specified
strength of concrete in the ribbed and hollow slabs are used permanently, it is permitted to
include the vertical shells of fillers in contact with the ribs for shear and negative‐moment
strength computations, provided adequate bond between the two can be ensured.
6.5.9.3.2 Adequate shear strength of slabs shall be provided in accordance with the requirements
of 6.4.10. For one‐way ribbed and hollow slab construction, contribution of concrete to shear
strength is permitted to be 10 percent more than that specified in 6.4.2. It is permitted to
increase shear strength using shear reinforcement or by widening the ends of ribs.
6.5.9.4 Deflection
The recommendations for deflection with respect to solid slabs may be applied to ribbed and hollow slab.
Total depth of one‐way ribbed and hollow slabs shall not be less than those required by Table 6.2.5.1
in 6.2.5.2. For other slabs the provisions of 6.2.5.3 shall apply.
6.5.9.5 Size and Position of Ribs
In‐situ‐ribs shall be not less than 100 mm wide. They shall be spaced at centres not greater than 750 mm
apart and their depth, excluding any topping, shall be not more than three and half times their width. Ribs
shall be formed along each edge parallel to the span of one‐way slabs.
The recommendations given in 8.1.6 regarding maximum distance between bars apply to areas of solid
concrete in this form of construction. The curtailment, anchorage and cover to reinforcement shall be as
specified below:
a) At least 50 per cent of the total main reinforcement shall be carried through the bottom
on to the bearing and anchored in accordance with 8.2.8.
b) Where a slab, which is continuous over supports, has been designed as simply supported,
reinforcement shall be provided over the support to control cracking. This reinforcement
shall have a cross‐sectional area of not less than one quarter of that required in the
middle of the adjoining spans and shall extend at least one‐tenth of the clear span into
adjoining spans.
c) In slabs with permanent blocks, the side cover to the reinforcement shall not be less than
10 mm. In all other cases, cover shall be provided according to 8.1.7.
6.6 WALLS
6.6.1 Scope
6.6.1.1 Provisions of Sec. 6.6 shall apply for design of walls subjected to axial load, with or without
flexure.
6.6.1.2 Cantilever retaining walls are designed according to flexural design provisions of Sec. 6.3 with
minimum horizontal reinforcement according to 6.6.3.3.
6.6.2 General
6‐80 Vol. 2
Chapter 1
6.6.2.1 Walls shall be designed for eccentric loads and any lateral or other loads to which they are
subjected.
6.6.2.2 Walls subject to axial loads shall be designed in accordance with 6.6.2, 6.6.3, and either 6.6.4,
6.6.5, or 6.6.8.
6.6.2.3 Design for shear shall be in accordance with 6.4.8.
6.6.2.4 Unless otherwise demonstrated by an analysis, the horizontal length of wall considered as
effective for each concentrated load shall not exceed the smaller of the center‐to‐center
distance between loads, and the bearing width plus four times the wall thickness.
6.6.2.5 Compression members built integrally with walls shall conform to 6.3.8.2.
6.6.2.6 Walls shall be anchored to intersecting elements, such as floors and roofs; or to columns
pilasters, buttresses, of intersecting walls; and to footings.
6.6.2.7 Quantity of reinforcement and limits of thickness required by 6.6.3 and 6.6.5 shall be
permitted to be waived where structural analysis shows adequate strength and stability.
6.6.2.8 Transfer of force to footing at base of wall shall be in accordance with 6.8.8.
6.6.3 Minimum reinforcement
6.6.3.1 Minimum vertical and horizontal reinforcement shall be in accordance with 6.6.3.2 and 6.6.3.3
unless a greater amount is required for shear by 6.4.8.8 and 6.4.8.9.
6.6.3.2 Minimum ratio of vertical reinforcement area to gross concrete area, , shall be:

a) 0.0012 for deformed bars not larger than ΦΦ16 mm with not less than 420 MPa; or
b) 0.0015 for other deformed bars; or
c) 0.0012 for welded wire reinforcement not larger than MW200 or MD200.
6.6.3.3 Minimum ratio of horizontal reinforcement area to gross concrete area, , shall be:

a) 0.0020 for deformed bars not larger than Φ16 mm with not less than 420 MPa; or
b) 0.0025 for other deformed bars; or
c) 0.0020 for welded wire reinforcement not larger than MW200 or MD200.
6.6.3.4 Walls more than 250 mm thick, except basement walls, shall have reinforcement for each
direction placed in two layers parallel with faces of wall in accordance with the following:
a) One layer consisting of not less than one‐half and not more than two‐thirds of total
reinforcement required for each direction shall be placed not less than 50 mm nor more
than one‐third the thickness of wall from the exterior surface;
b) The other layer, consisting of the balance of required reinforcement in that direction,
shall be placed not less than 20 mm nor more than one‐third the thickness of wall from
the interior surface.
6.6.3.5 Vertical and horizontal reinforcement shall not be spaced farther apart than three times the
wall thickness, nor farther apart than 450 mm.
6.6.3.6 Vertical reinforcement need not be enclosed by lateral ties if vertical reinforcement area is
not greater than 0.01 times gross concrete area, or where vertical reinforcement is not
required as compression reinforcement.
6.6.3.7 In addition to the minimum reinforcement required by 6.6.3.1, not less than two ΦΦ16 mm
bars in walls having two layers of reinforcement in both directions and one ΦΦ16 mm bar in

Part 6
Structural Design

walls having a single layer of reinforcement in both directions shall be provided around
window, door, and similar sized openings. Such bars shall be anchored to develop in
tension at the corners of the openings.
6.6.4 Design of walls as compression members
Except as provided in 6.6.5, walls subject to axial load or combined flexure and axial load shall be designed
as compression members in accordance with provisions of 6.3.2, 6.3.3, 6.3.10, 6.3.11, 6.3.14, 6.6.2, and
6.6.3.
6.6.5 Empirical method of design
6.6.5.1 Walls of solid rectangular cross section shall be permitted to be designed by the empirical
provisions of 6.6.5 if the resultant of all factored loads is located within the middle third of the
overall thickness of the wall and all limits of 6.6.2, 6.6.3, and 6.6.5 are satisfied.
6.6.5.2 Design axial strength of a wall satisfying limitations of 6.6.5.1 shall be computed by Eq.

(6.6.1) unless designed in accordance with 6.6.4.
0.55 1 6.6.1
where φ shall correspond to compression‐controlled sections in accordance with 6.2.3.2.2 and effective
length factor shall be:
For walls braced top and bottom against lateral translation and
a) Restrained against rotation at one or both ends (top, bottom, or 0.8
b) Unrestrained against rotation at both ends 1.0
For walls not braced against lateral translation 2.0
6.6.5.3 Minimum thickness of walls designed by empirical design method
6.6.5.3.1 Thickness of bearing walls shall not be less than 1/25 the supported height or length,
whichever is shorter, nor less than 100 mm.
6.6.5.3.2 Thickness of exterior basement walls and foundation walls shall not be less than 190 mm.
6.6.6 Nonbearing walls
6.6.6.1 Thickness of nonbearing walls shall not be less than 100 mm, nor less than 1/30 the least
distance between members that provide lateral support.
6.6.7 Walls as grade beams
6.6.7.1 Walls designed as grade beams shall have top and bottom reinforcement as required for
moment in accordance with provisions of 6.3.2 through 6.3.7. Design for shear shall be in
accordance with provisions of Sec. 6.4.
6.6.7.2 Portions of grade beam walls exposed above grade shall also meet requirements of 6.6.3.
6.6.8 Alternative design of slender walls
6.6.8.1 When flexural tension controls the out‐of‐plane design of a wall, the requirements of 6.6.8 are
considered to satisfy 6.3.10.
6.6.8.2 Walls designed by the provisions of 6.6.8 shall satisfy 6.6.8.2.1 through 6.6.8.2.6.
6‐82 Vol. 2
Chapter 1
6.6.8.2.1 The wall panel shall be designed as a simply supported, axially loaded member subjected to an
out‐of‐plane uniform lateral load, with maximum moments and deflections occurring at
midspan.
6.6.8.2.2 The cross section shall be constant over the height of the panel.
6.6.8.2.3 The wall shall be tension‐controlled.
6.6.8.2.4 Reinforcement shall provide a design Strength
6.6.2
where shall be obtained using the modulus of rupture, , given by Eq. (6.2.3).
6.6.8.2.5 Concentrated gravity loads applied to the wall above the design flexural section shall be
assumed to be distributed over a width:
a) Equal to the bearing width, plus a width on each side that increases at a slope of 2
vertical to 1 horizontal down to the design section; but
b) Not greater than the spacing of the concentrated loads; and
c) Not extending beyond the edges of the wall panel.
6.6.8.2.6 Vertical stress ⁄ at the midheight section shall not exceed 0.06 .
6.6.8.3 Design moment strength for combined flexure and axial loads at midheight shall be

6.6.3
where
∆ 6.6.4
is the maximum factored moment at midheight of wall due to lateral and eccentric vertical loads, not
including ∆ effects, and is
∆ 6.6.5
.
shall be obtained by iteration of deflections, or by Eq. (6.6.6).
6.6.6

.
where
6.6.7
and the value of / shall not be taken less than 6.
6.6.8.4 Maximum out‐of‐plane deflection, , due to service loads, including ∆ effects, shall not

exceed /150.
If , maximum moment at midheight of wall due to service lateral and eccentric vertical loads, including
∆ effects, exceeds 2/3 , shall be calculated by Eq. (6.6.8)
/
∆ 2/3 ∆ ∆ 2/3 ∆ 6.6.8
/
If does not exceed 2/3 , shall be calculated by Eq. (6.6.9)
∆ ∆ 6.6.9
where
∆ 6.6.10
∆ 6.6.11
shall be calculated by Eq. (6.6.7), and shall be obtained by iteration of deflections.

Part 6
Structural Design

6.7 Stairs:
Stairs are the structural elements designed to connect different floors. The stairs shall be designed to
meet the minimum load requirements. The flight arrangements, configuration and support conditions
(Figure 6.7.1.1) shall govern the design procedure to follow.
Figure 6.7.1.1: Different forms of stairs and landing arrangements
6.7.1 Stairs supported at landing level
6.7.1.1 Effective span
The effective span of stairs without stringer beams shall be taken as the following horizontal distances:
a) Centre to centre distance of beams, where supported at top and bottom risers by beams
spanning parallel with the risers,
b) Where supported at the edge of a landing slab, which spans parallel with the risers,
(Figure 6.7.1.2a) a distance equal to the going of the stairs plus at each end either half
the width of the landing or 1.0m whichever is smaller. The going shall be measured
horizontally.
c) Where the landing spans in the same direction of the stairs (Figure 6.7.1.2b), the span
shall be the distance centre to centre of the supporting beams or walls.
d) Where the landing slabs, running at right angle to the direction of the flight, supported by
walls or beams on three sides (Figure 6.7.1.2c), the effective span shall be going of the
stair measured horizontally. Both positive and negative moments along the direction of
the flight shall be calculated as ⁄8 , where w is the intensity of the total dead and live
load per unit area on a horizontal plane.
6‐84 Vol. 2
Chapter 1

Figure 6.7.1.2: Effective Span for Stairs Supported at Each End by Landings
6.7.1.2 Loading
Staircases shall be designed to support the design ultimate load according to the load combinations
specified in Chapter 2, loads.
6.7.1.3 Distribution of loading
6.7.1.3.1 Where flights or landing are embedded at least 110 mm into walls and are designed to span
in the direction of the flight, a 150 mm strip may be deducted from the loaded area and the
effective breadth of the section may be increased by 75 mm for the purpose of design
(Figure 6.7.1.3)
6.7.1.3.2 In the case of stairs with open wells, where spans cross at right angles, the load on areas
common to any two such spans may be taken as one half in each direction as shown in Figure
6.7.1.4.

Part 6
Structural Design

Figure 6.7.1.3: Loading on stairs Built in a wall

Figure 6.7.1.4: Loading of Stairs with open wells
6.7.1.4 Depth of section
The depth of the section shall be taken as the minimum thickness perpendicular to the soffit of the
staircase.
6.7.1.5 Design
6.7.1.5.1 Strength, Deflection and Crack Control
The recommendations given in Sec 6.1 & 6.2 for beams and one‐way slabs shall apply, except for the
span/depth ratio of staircases without stringer beam where the provision of 6.7.1.5.2 below shall apply.
6.7.1.5.2 Permissible span/effective depth ratio for staircase without stringer beams. Provided the stair
flight occupies at least 60% of the span, the ratio calculated in accordance with 6.2.5.2 shall be
increased by 15%.
6.7.2 Free standing stair (landing unsupported)
6.7.2.1 Effective Span
The effective span for flights and landings of free standing stairs are given in Figure 6.7.2.1. In taking these
distances, the spans shall be measured as the centre to centre distance between the stinger beams. In
stairs without stinger beams, span shall be measured in between the edges.

6‐86 Vol. 2
Chapter 1

Figure 6.7.2.1: Free Standing Stair Slab Geometry, (a) Elevation, (b) Plan
6.7.2.2 Loading
Staircases shall be designed to support the design ultimate load according to the load combinations
specified in Chapter 2, loads.
6.7.2.3 Distribution of Loading
The stair shall be designed for uniformly distributed loading.
6.7.2.4 Depth of Section
The depth of the section shall be taken as the minimum thickness perpendicular to the soffit of the
staircase.
6.7.3 DESIGN
6.7.3.1.1 Empirical expressions for deflections, and forces and moments at critical locations of free
standing stairs are given in terms of the various dimensions of the stairway in Table 6.7.3.1.
These expressions, which are explicit and of empirical nature, are valid within the applicable
range of the geometric parameters (see Figure 6.7.2.1) and concrete strength. In these
equations, the unit of force is Kilo Newton (kN) and the unit of length is millimeter (mm).
Thickness of the flight and landing slabs are assumed to be equal.
6.7.3.1.2 The equations in Table 6.7.3.1 give working values of moments and forces corresponding to
0.48x10‐2 MPa live load and appropriate dead load of slab and steps based on unit weight of
2.356x10‐5 N/mm3. Forces and moments for other values of live load shall be calculated by
simple proportioning.
6.7.3.1.3 To convert from working to ultimate design values, the working values of moments and
forces in Table 6.7.1 shall be multiplied by a conversion factor equal to the ratio of factored
ultimate load and un‐factored service load.
6.7.3.1.4 Apart from maintaining the standard code provisions in detailing the reinforcement as
stipulated elsewhere in this code, additional detailing as described below (6.7.3.1.5 through
6.7.3.1.9) shall be done to take care of the important features which are special to the free
standing stairway.
6.7.3.1.5 To account for the non‐uniform distribution of the total bending moment at support across
the width of the section, three‐fourths of the total negative steel shall be distributed across
the outer half of the width of support section and the rest of the negative steel shall be
distributed within the inner half of the width of support section.

Part 6
Structural Design

6.7.3.1.6 Similar proportioning of reinforcement layout as to 6.7.3.1.5, but in reverse order shall also be
done at flight‐landing junction (kink).
6.7.3.1.7 At midspan of flights, the positive steel shall be distributed uniformly across the section.
6.7.3.1.8 Of the total steel required to resist the negative bending at mid‐landing section, 50 percent
shall be placed within the inner one‐third of the width of section. The rest shall be distributed
across of the outer two‐thirds of the width.
6.7.3.1.9 The suggested bar curtailment scheme for the free standing stairway is shown in Figure
6.7.3.1. Half of the negative steel at support may be terminated at a distance of /4 from the
support. Another 25 percent may be bent downward at a distance of /4 to provide part of
the flight midspan positive steel. The rest 25 percent is recommended to continue straight
towards the flight‐landing junction. This 25 percent may be merged with the negative steel at
kink. Fifty percent of the flight midspan positive steel should span from kink and terminate at
a point /5 from the support unless they are bent up for negative steel. The rest should start
from a point at a distance of /5 from kink and would terminate at /4 from support. Of the
total negative steel at mid‐landing section, half of it will terminate at a distance /2 from free
edge and the rest will cover the whole length of landing. Half of the negative steel at kink will
project into landing upto the free edge and the rest may be terminated at a distance of /2.

Figure 6.7.3.1: Recommended Bar Curtailment Details for Free Standing Stairs
6‐88 Vol. 2
Table 6.7.3.1 EXPRESSIONS FOR DEFLECTION, FORCES & MOMENTS IN FREE STANDING STAIRS
= _____mm. =______mm =_______mm. =_______mm. =_______mm. =_______mm. f c′

150 < < 1000 900 < < 1875 915 < < 1900 2030 < < 3550 2440 < < 4320 100 < < 280 =________MPa. Value
14 < f c′ < 40
Vertical Consta 1+0.00545(A‐ 1+0.00114(B‐ 1+0.00165(C‐ 1‐7.87x10‐6 (L ‐ 1‐19.68x10‐6(H‐ 1‐0.161 (T‐ 1 – 1.074x10‐6( f c′
deflection at nt 125)0.94 914)1.1 914)0.93 2030) 2440) 100)0.334 ‐14).93
landing 2.03
corner, mm
Support Consta 1.555+0.000787( 1.06‐0.00022 (B‐ 1.2+0.00276(C‐ 1+0.000748(L‐ 1+5.9x10‐6(H‐ 0.39+0.00173(T‐ 1.0
negative nt A‐50) 860) 864) 2030) 2440) 90)
moment, kN‐ ‐4.712
m
Flight Consta 1.1‐31.48x10‐6(A‐ 1‐70.11x10‐6(B‐ 1.0 1+0.128x10‐6(L‐ 1+0.899x10‐9(H‐ 1‐.00165(T‐ 1
midspan nt 150)1.52 915)1.365 2030)2.66 2440)2.77 100)1.17
positive ‐1.526
moment,
kN‐m
Negative Consta 1.23+0.000512(A‐ 1.01+0.00323(B‐ .85+0.000709(C‐ 1.0 1.0 0.95+0.00447(T‐ 1
moment at nt 125) 915) 915) 100)1.03
kink, kN‐m ‐3.447
‐6
Negative Consta 1+0.000303(A‐ 1+0.00118(B‐915) 1+0.00106(C‐ 1+0.000409(L‐ 1+26.37x10 (H‐ 1+0.00185(T‐100) 1
moment at nt 150) 915) 2030) 2040)
midsection of ‐6.14
landing, kN‐m
Axial force in Consta 1+0.000236(A‐ 1+0.000787(B‐ 1+0.000827(C‐ 1+0.000354(L‐ 1‐0.000157(H‐ 1+0.00276(T‐100) 1
flights, kN nt 125) 915) 915) 2030) 2440)
34.69
Part 6

Part 6
Structural Design

Torsion in Consta 1+0.00177(A‐125) 1+0.00063(B‐915) 1+0.00268(C‐ 1‐8.0x10‐6(L‐ 1.0 1+0.00358(T‐100) 1

flights, kN‐m. nt 915) 2030).75
2.312
Inplane Consta 1.1+0.000866(A‐ 1+0.000984(B‐ 1+0.00157(C‐ 1+0.00059(L‐ 1‐0.000197(H‐ 1+0.0026(T‐100) 1
moment in nt 150) 915) 915) 2030) 2440)
flights, kN‐m ‐14.35
Lateral shear Consta 1‐0.000276(A‐ 1+0.00138(B‐915) 1+0.000709(C‐ 1+0.000669(L‐ 1‐0.00024(H‐ 1+0.000746(T‐ 1
in mid‐section nt 150) 915) 2030) 2440) 100)1.3
of landing, kN 30.17
6‐90 Vol. 2
6.7.4 Sawtooth (slab less) stair
6.7.4.1 Loading
The stair shall be designed to support the design ultimate load according to the load combinations specified in
Chapter 2, Loads.
6.7.4.2 Distribution of loading
Where flights or landing are embedded at least 110 mm into the walls and are designed to span in the direction of
the flight, a 150mm strip may be deducted from the loaded area and the effective breadth of the section may be
increased by 75 mm for the purpose of design (Figure 6.7.1.3).
Sawtooth stairs shall be supported with stringer beams at landing levels (Figure 6.7.4.1). The effective span for
the stair shall be the going of the stair measured horizontally (Figure 6.7.4.1) from the face of the stringer beams.

Figure 6.7.4.1: Elements of saw‐tooth stair and typical reinforcement arrangements
6.7.4.4 Design
The midspan moments for sawtooth stairs are given by:
6.7.1

Part 6
Part 6
Structural Design
Where, = stiffness of tread/stiffness of riser and j is the number of treads (Figure 6.7.4.1).
If is odd: 1 2 , 1 1 2 3 ,
, 1 .
If is even: 1 2 , 1 2 3 , 1 ,
2

The chart on Figure 6.7.4.2 gives the support‐moment coefficients for various ratios of stiffness of tread/stiffness
of riser and numbers of treads. Having found the support moment, the maximum midspan bending moment shall
be determined by using the appropriate expression on the Figure 6.7.4.2 and subtracting the support moment.

Figure 6.7.4.2: Support moment coefficients for saw‐tooth stair
6.7.4.5 Detailing
Typical bending‐moment and shearing‐force diagrams for a stair are shown on Figure 6.7.4.1 together with
suggested arrangements of reinforcement. The re‐entrant corners of the stair‐profile shall be designed for stress
concentrations. This has to be facilitated by providing twice of the reinforcements calculated from Eqn. 6.7.1 and
Figure 6.7.4.2. Fillets or haunches can also be incorporated in lieu at these junctions. The method of reinforcing
the stair shown in diagram (a) of Figure 6.7.4.1 is very suitable but is generally only practicable if haunches are
provided. Otherwise the arrangement shown in diagram (b) should be adopted.
6.7.5 Helicoidal stair
6.7.5.1 Loading
The stair shall be designed to support the design ultimate load according to the load combinations specified in
Chapter 2, Loads.
6‐92 Vol. 2
Chapter 1
6.7.5.2 Geometry
The pertinent geometry of the Helicoidal stair is given at Figure 6.7.5.1 where:
, : second moment of area of stair section about horizontal axis and axis normal to slope, respectively
: total loading per unit length projected along centre‐line of load
: radius of centre‐line of loading = 2/3 /
: radius of centre‐line of steps = 1/2
, where and are the internal and external radii of
the stair, respectively
: angle subtended in plan between point considered and midpoint of stair
: total angle subtended by helix in plan

: slope of tangent to helix centre‐line measured from horizontal

Figure 6.7.5.1: Elements of helicoidal stair (a) Plan; (b) Elevation
Helicoidal stairs shall be supported with stringer beams at landing levels (Figure 6.7.1.1). The effective span for
the stair shall be the total angle, subtended by helix in plan measured horizontally (Figure 6.7.5.1) from the face
of the stringer beams.
6.7.5.4 Depth of section
The depth of the section shall be taken as the minimum thickness perpendicular to the soffit of the stair unless
otherwise the large geometric dimensions warrant calculating the deflections through a suitable numerical
analysis.
6.7.5.5 Design
The design forces and moments for helicoidal stairs are given in Figure 6.7.5.2. Typical shear force, thrust,
moment and torsion diagrams are provided in Figure 6.7.5.2. The moments, thrust, torsion and shear forces shall
be obtained from the following equations:
Lateral moment:
sin φ φ cos φ sin cos φ sinφ sin 6.7.2
Torsional moment
sin cos tanφ sin cos φ sin sinφ 6.7.3
Vertical moment:
cos tanφ sin 1 cos 6.7.4
Thrust:
sin cos φ sinφ 6.7.5
Lateral shearing force across stair:
cos φ sin sinφ 6.7.6

Part 6
Structural Design
Radial horizontal shearing force:
cos 6.7.7
Where,
Redundant moment acting tangentially at midspan: 6.7.8
Horizontal redundant force at midspan: 6.7.9
Vertical moment at supports: 6.7.10
Values of coefficients , , for different , and , shall be obtained from Figures 6.7.5.3a‐d.

Figure 6.7.5.2: Typical force, moment and torsion diagrams for helicoidal stair.

6‐94 Vol. 2
Chapter 1
2.4
R1/R2 = 1.05
φ = 200
2.0 b/h = 5
0
25
1.6 30
0
1.2
Curves for k2
Values of k
0.8
0.4
0.0 0 20
0
30 φ= Curves for k1
-0.4 φ = 200
Curves for k3
-0.8
-1.2
-1.6
90 180 270 360
Values of β

Figure 6.7.5.3a: Design charts for helicoidal stair slabs (R1/R2 = 1.05; b/h = 5)
2.4
R1/R2 = 1.05 φ = 20
0
2.0 b/h = 13
0
25
1.6 30
0
Curves for k2
1.2
0.8
Values of k
0.4
0.0
Curves for k1
φ = 200
-0.4
Curves for k3 30
0
-0.8 0
φ = 20
-1.2
-1.6
90 180 270 360
Values of β

Figure 6.7.5.3b: Design charts for helicoidal stair slabs (R1/R2 = 1.05; b/h = 13)

Part 6
Structural Design
2.4
R1/R2 = 1.1 0
φ = 20
2.0 b/h = 5
0
25
1.6
0 Curves for k2
30
1.2
Values of k
0.8
0.4
0.0
0
30 φ = 200 Curves for k1
-0.4 0
φ = 20
-0.8
Curves for k3
-1.2
-1.6
90 180 270 360
Values of β

Figure 6.7.5.3c: Design charts for helicoidal stair slabs (R1/R2 = 1.1; b/h =5)
2.4
φ = 200
R1/R2 = 1.1
0
2.0 b/h = 13 25
0
30
1.6
Curves for k2
1.2
Values of k
0.8
0.4
0.0
Curves for k1
-0.4 φ = 200
Curves for k3 30
0
-0.8 0
0 30
φ = 20
-1.2
-1.6
90 180 270 360
Values of β

Figure 6.7.5.3d: Design charts for helicoidal stair slabs (R1/R2 = 1.1; b/h = 13)

6‐96 Vol. 2
Chapter 1
6.8 FOOTINGS
6.8.1 Scope
6.8.1.1 Provisions of Sec. 6.8 shall apply for design of isolated footings and, where applicable, to combined
footings and mats.
6.8.1.2 Additional requirements for design of combined footings and mats are given in 6.8.10.
6.8.2 Loads and reactions
6.8.2.1 Footings shall be proportioned to resist the factored loads and induced reactions, in accordance with
the appropriate design requirements of this Code and as provided in Sec. 6.8.
6.8.2.2 Base area of footing or number and arrangement of piles shall be determined from unfactored forces
and moments transmitted by footing to soil or piles and permissible soil pressure or permissible pile
capacity determined through principles of soil mechanics.
6.8.2.3 For footings on piles, computations for moments and shears shall be permitted to be based on the
assumption that the reaction from any pile is concentrated at pile center.
6.8.3 Equivalent square shapes for circular or regular polygonshaped columns or pedestals supported
by footings
For location of critical sections for moment, shear, and development of reinforcement in footings, it shall be
permitted to treat circular or regular polygon‐shaped concrete columns or pedestals as square members with the
same area.
6.8.4 Moment in footings
6.8.4.1 External moment on any section of a footing shall be determined by passing a vertical plane through
the footing, and computing the moment of the forces acting over entire area of footing on one side of
that vertical plane.
6.8.4.2 Maximum factored moment, , for an isolated footing shall be computed as prescribed in 6.8.4.1 at

critical sections located as follows:
a) At face of column, pedestal, or wall, for footings supporting a concrete column, pedestal, or wall;
b) Halfway between middle and edge of wall, for footings supporting a masonry wall;
c) Halfway between face of column and edge of steel base plate, for footings supporting a column
with steel base plate.
6.8.4.3 In one‐way footings and two‐way square footings, reinforcement shall be distributed uniformly across
entire width of footing.
6.8.4.4 In two‐way rectangular footings, reinforcement shall be distributed in accordance with 6.8.4.4.1 and
6.8.4.4.2.
6.8.4.4.1 Reinforcement in long direction shall be distributed uniformly across entire width of footing.
6.8.4.4.2 For reinforcement in short direction, a portion of the total reinforcement, , shall be distributed

uniformly over a band width (centered on centerline of column or pedestal) equal to the length of
short side of footing. Remainder of reinforcement required in short direction 1 – , shall be
distributed uniformly outside center band width of footing.

6.8.1

Part 6
Structural Design
where β is ratio of long to short sides of footing.
6.8.5 Shear in footings
6.8.5.1 Shear strength of footings supported on soil or rock shall be in accordance with 6.4.10.
6.8.5.2 Location of critical section for shear in accordance with Sec. 6.4 shall be measured from face of
column, pedestal, or wall, for footings supporting a column, pedestal, or wall. For footings supporting
a column or pedestal with steel base plates, the critical section shall be measured from location
defined in 6.8.4.2(c).
6.8.5.3 Where the distance between the axis of any pile to the axis of the column is more than two times the
distance between the top of the pile cap and the top of the pile, the pile cap shall satisfy 6.4.10 and
6.8.5.4. Other pile caps shall satisfy either Appendix A, or both 6.4.10 and 6.8.5.4. If Appendix A is
used, the effective concrete compression strength of the struts, , shall be determined using
A.3.2.2(b).
6.8.5.4 Computation of shear on any section through a footing supported on piles (Fig. 6.8.5.1) shall be in
accordance with 6.8.5.4.1, 6.8.5.4.2, and 6.8.5.4.3.
6.8.5.4.1 Entire reaction from any pile with its center located /2 or more outside the section shall be
considered as producing shear on that section.
6.8.5.4.2 Reaction from any pile with its center located /2 or more inside the section shall be considered

as producing no shear on that section.
6.8.5.4.3 For intermediate positions of pile center, the portion of the pile reaction to be considered as
producing shear on the section shall be based on straight‐line interpolation between full value at
/2 outside the section and zero value at /2 inside the section.

Fig. 6.8.5.1—Modified critical perimeter for shear with over‐ lapping critical perimeters.
6.8.6 Development of reinforcement in footings
6.8.6.1 Development of reinforcement in footings shall be in accordance with Sec. 8.2.
6.8.6.2 Calculated tension or compression in reinforcement at each section shall be developed on each side
of that section by embedment length, hook (tension only) or mechanical device, or a combination
thereof.
6‐98 Vol. 2
Chapter 1
6.8.6.3 Critical sections for development of reinforcement shall be assumed at the same locations as defined
in 6.8.4.2 for maximum factored moment, and at all other vertical planes where changes of section or
reinforcement occur. See also 8.2.7.6.
6.8.7 Minimum footing depth
Depth of footing above bottom reinforcement shall not be less than 150 mm for footings on soil, nor less than 300
mm for footings on piles.
6.8.8 Force transfer at base of column, wall, or reinforced pedestal
6.8.8.1 Forces and moments at base of column, wall, or pedestal shall be transferred to supporting pedestal
or footing by bearing on concrete and by reinforcement, dowels, and mechanical connectors.
6.8.8.1.1 Bearing stress on concrete at contact surface between supported and supporting member shall not
exceed concrete bearing strength for either surface as given by 6.3.14.
6.8.8.1.2 Reinforcement, dowels, or mechanical connectors between supported and supporting members shall
be adequate to transfer:
a) All compressive force that exceeds concrete bearing strength of either member;
b) Any computed tensile force across interface.
In addition, reinforcement, dowels, or mechanical connectors shall satisfy 6.8.8.2 or 6.8.8.3.
6.8.8.1.3 If calculated moments are transferred to supporting pedestal or footing, then reinforcement, dowels,
or mechanical connectors shall be adequate to satisfy 8.2.15.
6.8.8.1.4 Lateral forces shall be transferred to supporting pedestal or footing in accordance with shear‐friction
provisions of 6.4.5, or by other appropriate means.
6.8.8.2 In cast‐in‐place construction, reinforcement required to satisfy 6.8.8.1 shall be provided either by
extending longitudinal bars into supporting pedestal or footing, or by dowels.
6.8.8.2.1 For cast‐in‐place columns and pedestals, area of reinforcement across interface shall be not less than
0.005 , where is the gross area of the supported member.
6.8.8.2.2 For cast‐in‐place walls, area of reinforcement across interface shall be not less than minimum vertical
reinforcement given in 6.6.3.2.
6.8.8.2.3 At footings, it shall be permitted to lap splice Φ43 mm and Φ57 mm longitudinal bars, in compression
only, with dowels to provide reinforcement required to satisfy 6.8.8.1. Dowels shall not be larger than
Φ36 mm bar and shall extend into supported member a distance not less than the larger of , of
Φ43 mm or Φ57 mm bars and compression lap splice length of the dowels, whichever is greater, and
into the footing a distance not less than of the dowels.
6.8.8.2.4 If a pinned or rocker connection is provided in cast‐in‐place construction, connection shall conform to
6.8.8.1 and 6.8.8.3.
6.8.8.3 In precast construction, anchor bolts or suitable mechanical connectors shall be permitted for
satisfying 6.8.8.1. Anchor bolts shall be designed in accordance with Appendix D.
6.8.8.3.1 Connection between precast columns or pedestals and supporting members shall meet the
requirements of 6.10.5.1.3(a).
6.8.8.3.2 Connection between precast walls and supporting members shall meet the requirements of
6.10.5.1.3(b) and (c).

Part 6
Structural Design
6.8.8.3.3 Anchor bolts and mechanical connections shall be designed to reach their design strength before
anchorage failure or failure of surrounding concrete. Anchor bolts shall be designed in accordance
with Appendix D.
6.8.9 Stepped or sloped footings
6.8.9.1 In sloped or stepped footings, angle of slope or depth and location of steps shall be such that design
requirements are satisfied at every section. (See also 8.2.7.6.)
6.8.9.2 Sloped or stepped footings designed as a unit shall be constructed to ensure action as a unit.
6.8.10 Combined footings and mats
6.8.10.1 Footings supporting more than one column, pedestal, or wall (combined footings or mats) shall be
proportioned to resist the factored loads and induced reactions, in accordance with appropriate
design requirements of the code.
6.8.10.2 The direct design method of Sec. 6.5 shall not be used for design of combined footings and mats.
6.8.10.3 Distribution of soil pressure under combined footings and mats shall be consistent with properties of
the soil and the structure and with established principles of soil mechanics.
6.8.10.4 Minimum reinforcing steel in mat foundations shall meet the requirements of Sec. 8.1.11.2 in each

principal direction. Maximum spacing shall not exceed 450 mm.
6.9 FOLDED PLATES AND SHELLS
6.9.1 Scope and definitions
6.9.1.1 Provisions of Sec. 6.9 shall apply to thin shell and folded plate concrete structures, including ribs and
edge members.
6.9.1.2 All provisions of this Code not specifically excluded, and not in conflict with provisions of Sec. 6.9,
shall apply to thin‐shell structures.
6.9.1.3 Thin shells
Three‐dimensional spatial structures made up of one or more curved slabs or folded plates whose thicknesses are
small compared to their other dimensions. Thin shells are characterized by their three‐dimensional load‐carrying
behavior, which is determined by the geometry of their forms, by the manner in which they are supported, and by
the nature of the applied load.
6.9.1.4 Folded plates
A class of shell structure formed by joining flat, thin slabs along their edges to create a three‐dimensional spatial
structure.
6.9.1.5 Ribbed shells
Spatial structures with material placed primarily along certain preferred rib lines, with the area between the ribs
filled with thin slabs or left open.
6.9.1.6 Auxiliary members
Ribs or edge beams that serve to strengthen, stiffen, or support the shell; usually, auxiliary members act jointly
with the shell.
6.9.1.7 Elastic analysis
6‐100 Vol. 2
Chapter 1
An analysis of deformations and internal forces based on equilibrium, compatibility of strains, and assumed elastic
behavior, and representing to a suitable approximation the three‐dimensional action of the shell together with its
auxiliary members.
6.9.1.8 Inelastic analysis
An analysis of deformations and internal forces based on equilibrium, nonlinear stress‐strain relations for
concrete and reinforcement, consideration of cracking and time‐dependent effects, and compatibility of strains.
The analysis shall represent to a suitable approximation three‐dimensional action of the shell together with its
auxiliary members.
6.9.1.9 Experimental analysis
An analysis procedure based on the measurement of deformations or strains, or both, of the structure or its
model; experimental analysis is based on either elastic or inelastic
behavior.
6.9.2 Analysis and design
6.9.2.1 Elastic behavior shall be an accepted basis for determining internal forces and displacements of thin
shells. This behavior shall be permitted to be established by computations based on an analysis of the
uncracked concrete structure in which the material is assumed linearly elastic, homogeneous, and
isotropic. Poisson’s ratio of concrete shall be permitted to be taken equal to zero.
6.9.2.2 Inelastic analyses shall be permitted to be used where it can be shown that such methods provide a
safe basis for design.
6.9.2.3 Equilibrium checks of internal resistances and external loads shall be made to ensure consistency of
results.
6.9.2.4 Experimental or numerical analysis procedures shall be permitted where it can be shown that such

procedures provide a safe basis for design.
6.9.2.5 Approximate methods of analysis shall be permitted where it can be shown that such methods
provide a safe basis for design.
6.9.2.6 The thickness of a shell and its reinforcement shall be proportioned for the required strength and
serviceability, using either the strength design method of 6.1.2.1 or the design method of 6.1.2.2.
6.9.2.7 Shell instability shall be investigated and shown by design to be precluded.
6.9.2.8 Auxiliary members shall be designed according to the applicable provisions of the Code. It shall be
permitted to assume that a portion of the shell equal to the flange width, as specified in 6.1.13, acts
with the auxiliary member. In such portions of the shell, the reinforcement perpendicular to the
auxiliary member shall be at least equal to that required for the flange of a T‐beam by 6.1.13.5.
6.9.2.9 Strength design of shell slabs for membrane and bending forces shall be based on the distribution of
stresses and strains as determined from either an elastic or an inelastic analysis.
6.9.2.10 In a region where membrane cracking is predicted, the nominal compressive strength parallel to the
cracks shall be taken as 0.4 .
6.9.3 Design strength of materials
6.9.3.1 Specified compressive strength of concrete at 28 days shall not be less than 21 MPa.
6.9.3.2 Specified yield strength of reinforcement shall not exceed 420 MPa.

Part 6
Structural Design
6.9.4 Shell reinforcement
6.9.4.1 Shell reinforcement shall be provided to resist tensile stresses from internal membrane forces, to
resist tension from bending and twisting moments, to limit shrinkage and temperature crack width
and spacing, and as reinforcement at shell boundaries, load attachments, and shell openings.
6.9.4.2 Tensile reinforcement shall be provided in two or more directions and shall be proportioned such that
its resistance in any direction equals or exceeds the component of internal forces in that direction.
Alternatively, reinforcement for the membrane forces in the slab shall be calculated as the
reinforcement required to resist axial tensile forces plus the tensile force due to shear‐friction
required to transfer shear across any cross section of the membrane. The assumed coefficient of
friction, , shall not exceed that specified in 6.4.5.4.3.
6.9.4.3 The area of shell reinforcement at any section as measured in two orthogonal directions shall not be
less than the slab shrinkage or temperature reinforcement required by 8.1.11.
6.9.4.4 Reinforcement for shear and bending moments about axes in the plane of the shell slab shall be
calculated in accordance with Sec. 6.3, 6.4 and 6.5.
6.9.4.5 The area of shell tension reinforcement shall be limited so that the reinforcement will yield before
either crushing of concrete in compression or shell buckling can take place.
6.9.4.6 In regions of high tension, membrane reinforcement shall, if practical, be placed in the general
directions of the principal tensile membrane forces. Where this is not practical, it shall be permitted
to place membrane reinforcement in two or more component directions.
6.9.4.7 If the direction of reinforcement varies more than 10 degrees from the direction of principal tensile
membrane force, the amount of reinforcement shall be reviewed in relation to cracking at service
loads.
6.9.4.8 Where the magnitude of the principal tensile membrane stress within the shell varies greatly over the
area of the shell surface, reinforcement resisting the total tension shall be permitted to be
concentrated in the regions of largest tensile stress where it can be shown that this provides a safe
basis for design. However, the ratio of shell reinforcement in any portion of the tensile zone shall be
not less than 0.0035 based on the overall thickness of the shell.
6.9.4.9 Reinforcement required to resist shell bending moments shall be proportioned with due regard to the
simultaneous action of membrane axial forces at the same location. Where shell reinforcement is
required in only one face to resist bending moments, equal amounts shall be placed near both
surfaces of the shell even though a reversal of bending moments is not indicated by the analysis.
6.9.4.10 Shell reinforcement in any direction shall not be spaced farther apart than 450 mm nor farther apart
than five times the shell thickness. Where the principal membrane tensile stress on the gross
concrete area due to factored loads exceeds 0.33 , reinforcement shall not be spaced farther
apart than three times the shell thickness.
6.9.4.11 Shell reinforcement at the junction of the shell and supporting members or edge members shall be
anchored in or extended through such members in accordance with the requirements of Sec. 8.2,
except that the minimum development length shall be 1.2 but not less than 450 mm.
6‐102 Vol. 2
Chapter 1
6.9.4.12 Splice lengths of shell reinforcement shall be governed by the provisions of Sec. 8.2, except that the
minimum splice length of tension bars shall be 1.2 times the value required by Sec. 8.2 but not less
than 450 mm. The number of splices in principal tensile reinforcement shall be kept to a practical
minimum. Where splices are necessary they shall be staggered at least with not more than one‐
third of the reinforcement spliced at any section.
6.9.5 Construction
6.9.5.1 When removal of formwork is based on a specific modulus of elasticity of concrete because of
stability or deflection considerations, the value of the modulus of elasticity, , used shall be
determined from flexural tests of field‐cured beam specimens. The number of test specimens, the
dimensions of test beam specimens, and test procedures shall be specified by the Engineer.
6.9.5.2 Contract documents shall specify the tolerances for the shape of the shell. If construction results in
deviations from the shape greater than the specified tolerances, an analysis of the effect of the
deviations shall be made and any required remedial actions shall be taken to ensure safe behavior.
6.10 PRECAST CONCRETE
6.10.1 Scope
6.10.1.1 All provisions of this Code, not specifically excluded and not in conflict with the provisions of Sec.
6.10, shall apply to structures incorporating precast concrete structural members.
6.10.2 General
6.10.2.1 Design of precast members and connections shall include loading and restraint conditions from initial
fabrication to end use in the structure, including form removal, storage, transportation, and erection.
6.10.2.2 When precast members are incorporated into a structural system, the forces and deformations
occurring in and adjacent to connections shall be included in the design.
6.10.2.3 Tolerances for both precast members and interfacing members shall be specified. Design of precast
members and connections shall include the effects of these tolerances.
6.10.2.4 In addition to the requirements for drawings and specifications in Sec. 1.9, (a) and (b) shall be
included in either the contract documents or shop drawings:
a) Details of reinforcement, inserts and lifting devices required to resist temporary loads from
handling, storage, transportation, and erection;
b) Required concrete strength at stated ages or stages of construction.
6.10.3 Distribution of forces among members
6.10.3.1 Distribution of forces that are perpendicular to the plane of members shall be established by analysis
or by test.
6.10.3.2 Where the system behavior requires in‐plane forces to be transferred between the members of a
precast floor or wall system, 6.10.3.2.1 and 6.10.3.2.2 shall apply.
6.10.3.2.1 In‐plane force paths shall be continuous through both connections and members.
6.10.3.2.2 Where tension forces occur, a continuous path of steel or steel reinforcement shall be provided.
6.10.4 Member design

Part 6
Structural Design
6.10.4.1 In one‐way precast floor and roof slabs and in one‐way precast, prestressed wall panels, all not wider
than 3.7 m, and where members are not mechanically connected to cause restraint in the transverse
direction, the shrinkage and temperature reinforcement requirements of Sec. 8.1.11 in the direction
normal to the flexural reinforcement shall be permitted to be waived. This waiver shall not apply to
members that require reinforcement to resist transverse flexural stresses.
6.10.4.2 For precast, nonprestressed walls the reinforcement shall be designed in accordance with the
provisions of Sec. 6.3 or 6.6, except that the area of horizontal and vertical reinforcement each shall
be not less than 0.001 , where is the gross cross‐sectional area of the wall panel. Spacing of
reinforcement shall not exceed 5 times the wall thickness nor 750 mm for interior walls nor 450 mm
for exterior walls.
6.10.5 Structural integrity
6.10.5.1 Except where the provisions of 6.10.5.2 govern, the minimum provisions of 6.10.5.1.1 through
6.10.5.1.4 for structural integrity shall apply to all precast concrete structures.
6.10.5.1.1 Longitudinal and transverse ties required by Sec. 8.1.12.3 shall connect members to a lateral load‐
resisting system.
6.10.5.1.2 Where precast elements form floor or roof diaphragms, the connections between diaphragm and
those members being laterally supported shall have a nominal tensile strength capable of resisting
not less than 4.4 kN per linear m.
6.10.5.1.3 Vertical tension tie requirements of Sec. 8.1.12.3 shall apply to all vertical structural members, except
cladding, and shall be achieved by providing connections at horizontal joints in accordance with (a)
through (c):
a) Precast columns shall have a nominal strength in tension not less than 1.4 , in lb. For columns
with a larger cross section than required by consideration of loading, a reduced effective area
, based on cross section required but not less than one‐half the total area, shall be permitted;
b) Precast wall panels shall have a minimum of two ties per panel, with a nominal tensile strength
not less than 44 kN per tie;
c) When design forces result in no tension at the base, the ties required by 6.10.5.1.3(b) shall be
permitted to be anchored into an appropriately reinforced concrete floor slab‐on‐ground.
6.10.5.1.4 Connection details that rely solely on friction caused by gravity loads shall not be used.
6.10.5.2 For precast concrete bearing wall structures three or more stories in height, the minimum provisions
of 6.10.5.2.1 through 6.10.5.2.5 shall apply (Fig. 6.10.5.1).
6.10.5.2.1 Longitudinal and transverse ties shall be provided in floor and roof systems to provide a nominal
strength of 22 kN per meter of width or length. Ties shall be provided over interior wall supports and
between members and exterior walls. Ties shall be positioned in or within 600 mm of the plane of the
floor or roof system.
6‐104 Vol. 2
Chapter 1

Fig. 6.10.5.1—Typical arrangement of tensile ties in large panel structures.
6.10.5.2.2 Longitudinal ties parallel to floor or roof slab spans shall be spaced not more than 3 m on centers.
Provisions shall be made to transfer forces around openings.
6.10.5.2.3 Transverse ties perpendicular to floor or roof slab spans shall be spaced not greater than the bearing
wall spacing.
6.10.5.2.4 Ties around the perimeter of each floor and roof, within 1.2 m of the edge, shall provide a nominal
strength in tension not less than 71 kN.
6.10.5.2.5 Vertical tension ties shall be provided in all walls and shall be continuous over the height of the
building. They shall provide a nominal tensile strength not less than 44 kN per horizontal meter of
wall. Not less than two ties shall be provided for each precast panel.
6.10.6 Connection and bearing design
6.10.6.1 Forces shall be permitted to be transferred between members by grouted joints, shear keys,
mechanical connectors, reinforcing steel connections, reinforced topping, or a combination of these
means.
6.10.6.1.1 The adequacy of connections to transfer forces between members shall be determined by analysis or
by test. Where shear is the primary result of imposed loading, it shall be permitted to use the
provisions of 6.4.5 as applicable.
6.10.6.1.2 When designing a connection using materials with different structural properties, their relative
stiffnesses, strengths, and ductilities shall be considered.
6.10.6.2 Bearing for precast floor and roof members on simple supports shall satisfy 6.10.6.2.1 and 6.10.6.2.2.
6.10.6.2.1 The allowable bearing stress at the contact surface between supported and supporting members and
between any intermediate bearing elements shall not exceed the bearing strength for either surface
or the bearing element, or both. Concrete bearing strength shall be as given in 6.3.14.

Part 6
Structural Design
6.10.6.2.2 Unless shown by test or analysis that performance will not be impaired, (a) and (b) shall be met (Fig.
6.10.6.1):
a) Each member and its supporting system shall have design dimensions selected so that, after
consideration of tolerances, the distance from the edge of the support to the end of the precast
member in the direction of the span is at least /180, but not less than:
For solid or hollow‐core slabs 50 mm
For beams or stemmed members 75 mm
b) Bearing pads at unarmored edges shall be set back a minimum of 13 mm from the face of the
support, or at least the chamfer dimension at chamfered edges.
6.10.6.2.3 The requirements of 8.2.8.1 shall not apply to the positive bending moment reinforcement for
statically determinate precast members, but at least one‐third of such reinforcement shall extend to
the center of the bearing length, taking into account permitted tolerances in Sec. 8.1.5.2c and
6.10.2.3.

Fig. 6.10.6.1—Bearing length on support
6.10.7 Items embedded after concrete placement
6.10.7.1 When approved by the designer, embedded items (such as dowels or inserts) that either protrude
from the concrete or remain exposed for inspection shall be permitted to be embedded while the
concrete is in a plastic state provided that 6.10.7.1.1, 6.10.7.1.2, and 6.10.7.1.3 are met.
6.10.7.1.1 Embedded items are not required to be hooked or tied to reinforcement within the concrete.
6.10.7.1.2 Embedded items are maintained in the correct position while the concrete remains plastic.
6.10.7.1.3 The concrete is properly consolidated around the embedded item.
6.10.8 Marking and identification
6.10.8.1 Each precast member shall be marked to indicate its location and orientation in the structure and
date of manufacture.
6.10.8.2 Identification marks shall correspond to placing drawings.
6.10.9 Handling
6‐106 Vol. 2
Chapter 1
6.10.9.1 Member design shall consider forces and distortions during curing, stripping, storage, transportation,
and erection so that precast members are not overstressed or otherwise damaged.
6.10.9.2 During erection, precast members and structures shall be adequately supported and braced to ensure
proper alignment and structural integrity until permanent connections are completed.
6.10.10 Evaluation of strength of precast construction
6.10.10.1 A precast element to be made composite with cast‐in‐place concrete shall be permitted to be tested
in flexure as a precast element alone in accordance with 6.10.10.1.1 and 6.10.10.1.2.
6.10.10.1.1 Test loads shall be applied only when calculations indicate the isolated precast element will not be
critical in compression or buckling.
6.10.10.1.2 The test load shall be that load which, when applied to the precast member alone, induces the same
total force in the tension reinforcement as would be induced by loading the composite member with
the test load required by 6.11.3.2.
6.10.10.2 The provisions of 6.11.5 shall be the basis for acceptance or rejection of the precast element.
6.11 EVALUATION OF STRENGTH OF EXISTING STRUCTURES
6.11.1 Strength evaluation — General
6.11.1.1 If there is doubt that a part or all of a structure meets the safety requirements of this Code, a strength
evaluation shall be carried out as required by the Engineer.
6.11.1.2 If the effect of the strength deficiency is well understood and if it is feasible to measure the
dimensions and material properties required for analysis, analytical evaluations of strength based on
those measurements shall suffice. Required data shall be determined in accordance with 6.11.2.
6.11.1.3 If the effect of the strength deficiency is not well understood or if it is not feasible to establish the

required dimensions and material properties by measurement, a load test shall be required if the
structure is to remain in service.
6.11.1.4 If the doubt about safety of a part or all of a structure involves deterioration, and if the observed
response during the load test satisfies the acceptance criteria, the structure or part of the structure
shall be permitted to remain in service for a specified time period. If deemed necessary by the
Engineer, periodic reevaluations shall be conducted.
6.11.2 Determination of material properties and required dimensions
6.11.2.1 Dimensions of the structural elements shall be established at critical sections.
6.11.2.2 Locations and sizes of the reinforcing bars, welded wire reinforcement, or tendons shall be
determined by measurement. It shall be permitted to base reinforcement locations on available
drawings if spot checks are made confirming the information on the drawings.
6.11.2.3 If required, concrete strength shall be based on results of cylinder tests from the original construction
or tests of cores removed from the part of the structure where the strength is in question. For
strength evaluation of an existing structure, cylinder or core test data shall be used to estimate an
equivalent . The method for obtaining and testing cores shall be in accordance with ASTM C42M.

Part 6
Structural Design
6.11.2.4 If required, reinforcement or prestressing steel strength shall be based on tensile tests of
representative samples of the material in the structure in question.
6.11.2.5 If the required dimensions and material properties are determined through measurements and
testing, and if calculations can be made in accordance with 6.11.1.2, it shall be permitted to increase
φ from those specified in 6.2.3, but φ shall not be more than:
Tension‐controlled sections, as defined in 6.3.3.4 1.0
Compression‐controlled sections, as defined in 6.3.3.3:
Members with spiral reinforcement conforming to 6.3.9.3 0.9
Other reinforced members 0.8
Shear and/or torsion 0.8
Bearing on concrete 0.8
6.11.3 Load test procedure
6.11.3.1 Load arrangement
The number and arrangement of spans or panels loaded shall be selected to maximize the deflection and stresses
in the critical regions of the structural elements of which strength is in doubt. More than one test load
arrangement shall be used if a single arrangement will not simultaneously result in maximum values of the effects
(such as deflection, rotation, or stress) necessary to demonstrate the adequacy of the structure.
6.11.3.2 Load intensity
The total test load (including dead load already in place) shall not be less than the larger of (a), (b), and (c):
a) 1.15 1.5 0.4
b) 1.15 0.9 1.5
c) 1.3
The load factor on the live load in (b) shall be permitted to be reduced to 0.45 except for garages, areas
occupied as places of public assembly, and all areas where is greater than 4.8 kN/m2. It shall be permitted to
reduce in accordance with the provisions of the applicable general building code.
6.11.3.3 A load test shall not be made until that portion of the structure to be subjected to load is at least 56
days old. If the owner of the structure, the contractor, and all involved parties agree, it shall be
permitted to make the test at an earlier age.
6.11.4 Loading criteria
6.11.4.1 The initial value for all applicable response measurements (such as deflection, rotation, strain, slip,
crack widths) shall be obtained not more than 1 hour before application of the first load increment.
Measurements shall be made at locations where maximum response is expected. Additional
measurements shall be made if required.
6.11.4.2 Test load shall be applied in not less than four approximately equal increments.
6.11.4.3 Uniform test load shall be applied in a manner to ensure uniform distribution of the load transmitted
to the structure or portion of the structure being tested. Arching of the applied load shall be avoided.
6.11.4.4 A set of response measurements shall be made after each load increment is applied and after the
total load has been applied on the structure for at least 24 hours.
6.11.4.5 Total test load shall be removed immediately after all response measurements defined in 6.11.4.4
are made.
6.11.4.6 A set of final response measurements shall be made 24 hours after the test load is removed.
6‐108 Vol. 2
Chapter 1
6.11.5 Acceptance criteria
6.11.5.1 The portion of the structure tested shall show no evidence of failure. Spalling and crushing of
compressed concrete shall be considered an indication of failure.
6.11.5.2 Measured deflections shall satisfy either Eq. (6.11.1) or (6.11.2):
ℓ
∆ 6.11.1
,
∆
∆ 6.11.2
If the measured maximum and residual deflections, and , do not satisfy Eq. (6.11.1) or (6.11.2), it shall be
permitted to repeat the load test.
The repeat test shall be conducted not earlier than 72 hours after removal of the first test load. The portion of the
structure tested in the repeat test shall be considered acceptable if deflection recovery satisfies the condition:
∆
∆ 6.11.3
where is the maximum deflection measured during the second test relative to the position of the structure at
the beginning of the second test.
6.11.5.3 Structural members tested shall not have cracks indicating the imminence of shear failure.
6.11.5.4 In regions of structural members without transverse reinforcement, appearance of structural cracks
inclined to the longitudinal axis and having a horizontal projection longer than the depth of the
member at midpoint of the crack shall be evaluated.
6.11.5.5 In regions of anchorage and lap splices, the appearance along the line of reinforcement of a series of
short inclined cracks or horizontal cracks shall be evaluated.
6.11.6 Provision for lower load rating
If the structure under investigation does not satisfy conditions or criteria of 6.11.1.2, 6.11.5.2, or 6.11.5.3, the
structure shall be permitted for use at a lower load rating based on the results of the load test or analysis, if
approved by the Engineer.
6.11.7 Safety
6.11.7.1 Load tests shall be conducted in such a manner as to provide for safety of life and structure during the
test.
6.11.7.2 Safety measures shall not interfere with load test procedures or affect results.
6.12 COMPOSITE CONCRETE FLEXURAL MEMBERS
6.12.1 Scope
6.12.1.1 Provisions of Sec. 6.12 shall apply for design of composite concrete flexural members defined as
precast concrete, cast‐in‐place concrete elements, or both, constructed in separate placements but
so interconnected that all elements respond to loads as a unit.
6.12.1.2 All provisions of the Code shall apply to composite concrete flexural members, except as specifically
modified in Sec. 6.12.
6.12.2 General
6.12.2.1 The use of an entire composite member or portions thereof for resisting shear and moment shall be
permitted.

Part 6
Structural Design
6.12.2.2 Individual elements shall be investigated for all critical stages of loading.
6.12.2.3 If the specified strength, unit weight, or other properties of the various elements are different,
properties of the individual elements or the most critical values shall be used in design.
6.12.2.4 In strength computations of composite members, no distinction shall be made between shored and
unshored members.
6.12.2.5 All elements shall be designed to support all loads introduced prior to full development of design
strength of composite members.
6.12.2.6 Reinforcement shall be provided as required to minimize cracking and to prevent separation of
individual elements of composite members.
6.12.2.7 Composite members shall meet requirements for control of deflections in accordance with 6.2.5.4.
6.12.3 Shoring
When used, shoring shall not be removed until supported elements have developed design properties required to
support all loads and limit deflections and cracking at time of shoring removal.
6.12.4 Vertical shear strength
6.12.4.1 Where an entire composite member is assumed to resist vertical shear, design shall be in accordance
with requirements of Sec. 6.4 as for a monolithically cast member of the same cross‐sectional shape.
6.12.4.2 Shear reinforcement shall be fully anchored into interconnected elements in accordance with 8.2.10.
6.12.4.3 Extended and anchored shear reinforcement shall be permitted to be included as ties for horizontal
shear.
6.12.5 Horizontal shear strength
6.12.5.1 In a composite member, full transfer of horizontal shear forces shall be ensured at contact surfaces of
interconnected elements.
6.12.5.2 For the provisions of 6.12.5, shall be taken as the distance from extreme compression fiber for
entire composite section to centroid of longitudinal tension reinforcement, if any.
6.12.5.3 Unless calculated in accordance with 6.12.5.4, design of cross sections subject to horizontal shear
shall be based on
6.12.1
where is nominal horizontal shear strength in accordance with 6.12.5.3.1 through 6.12.5.3.4.
6.12.5.3.1 Where contact surfaces are clean, free of laitance, and intentionally roughened, shall not be

taken greater than 0.55 0.55.
6.12.5.3.2 Where minimum ties are provided in accordance with 6.12.6, and contact surfaces are clean and free
of laitance, but not intentionally roughened, shall not be taken greater than 0.55 .
6.12.5.3.3 Where ties are provided in accordance with 6.12.6, and contact surfaces are clean, free of laitance,
and intentionally roughened to a full amplitude of approximately 6 mm, shall be taken equal to
1.8 0.6 , but not greater than 3.5 . Values for in 6.4.5.4.3 shall apply and is
/ .
6‐110 Vol. 2
Chapter 1
6.12.5.3.4 Where at section considered exceeds 3.5 , design for horizontal shear shall be in

accordance with 6.4.5.4.
6.12.5.4 As an alternative to 6.12.5.3, horizontal shear shall be permitted to be determined by computing the
actual change in compressive or tensile force in any segment, and provisions shall be made to transfer
that force as horizontal shear to the supporting element. The factored horizontal shear force shall
not exceed horizontal shear strength as given in 6.12.5.3.1 through 6.12.5.3.4, where area of
contact surface shall be substituted for .
6.12.5.4.1 Where ties provided to resist horizontal shear are designed to satisfy 6.12.5.4, the tie area to tie
spacing ratio along the member shall approximately reflect the distribution of shear forces in the
member.
6.12.5.5 Where tension exists across any contact surface between interconnected elements, shear transfer by
contact shall be permitted only when minimum ties are provided in accordance with 6.12.6.
6.12.6 Ties for horizontal shear
6.12.6.1 Where ties are provided to transfer horizontal shear, tie area shall not be less than that required by
6.4.3.5.3, and tie spacing shall not exceed four times the least dimension of supported element, nor
exceed 600 mm.
6.12.6.2 Ties for horizontal shear shall consist of single bars or wire, multiple leg stirrups, or vertical legs of
welded wire reinforcement.
6.12.6.3 All ties shall be fully anchored into interconnected elements in accordance with 8.2.10.

Chapter 7
MASONRY STRUCTURES
7.1 INTRODUCTION
7.1.1 Scope
This chapter of the Code covers the design, construction and quality control of masonry structures.
7.1.2 Symbols and Notation
The following units shall be generally implicit in this chapter for the corresponding quantities:
Lengths m m
Areas mm2
Moment of inertia mm4
Force N
Moment, torsion Nmm
Stress, strength N/mm2
a = depth of equivalent rectangular stress block for strength design
Ab = cross‐sectional area of anchor bolt
Ae = effective area of masonry
Ag = gross area of wall
Amv = net area of masonry section bounded by wall thickness and length of section in the direction of
shear force considered
Ap = area of tension (pullout) cone of an embedded anchor bolt projected into the surface of
masonry
As = effective cross‐sectional area of reinforcement in a flexural member
Av = area of steel required for shear reinforcement perpendicular to the longitudinal reinforcement
As′ = effective cross‐sectional area of compression reinforcement in a flexural member
b = effective width of rectangular member or width of flange for T and I section
bt = computed tension force on anchor bolt
bv = allowable shear force on anchor bolt
bw = width of web in T and I member
Bt = allowable tension force on anchor bolt
Bv = computed shear force on anchor bolt
c = distance from the neutral axis to extreme fibre
Cd = masonry shear strength coefficient
d = distance from the compression face of a flexural member to the centroid of longitudinal tensile
reinforcement
db = diameter of the reinforcing bar, diameter of bolt
e = eccentricity of Pu
emu = maximum usable compressive strain of masonry
Part 6
Part 6
Structural Design
Em = modulus of elasticity of masonry
Es = modulus of elasticity of steel
fa = computed axial compressive stress due to design axial load
fb = computed flexural stress in the extreme fibre due to design bending load only
fmd = computed compressive stress in masonry due to dead load only
fr = modulus of rupture
fs = computed stress in reinforcement due to design load
fy = tensile yield stress of reinforcement
fv = computed shear stress due to design load
′
fm = specified compressive strength of masonry at the age of 28 days
F = loads due to weight and pressure of fluids or related moments and forces
Fa = allowable average axial compressive stress for centroidally applied axial load only
Fb = allowable flexural compressive stress if members were carrying bending load only
Fbr = allowable bearing stress
Fs = allowable stress in reinforcement
Fsc = allowable compressive stress in column reinforcement
Ft = allowable flexural tensile stress in masonry
Fv = allowable shear stress in masonry
G = shear modulus of masonry
h = height of wall between points of support
h′ = effective height of a wall or column
H = actual height between lateral supports
H' = height of opening
I = moment of inertia about the neutral axis of the cross‐sectional area
Ig,Icr = gross, cracked moment of inertia of the wall cross‐section
j = ratio or distance between centroid of flexural compressive force and centroid of tensile forces
to
depth, d
k = ratio of depth of the compression zone in flexural member to depth, d; stiffening coefficient
l = length of a wall or segment
lb = embedment depth of anchor bolt
lbe = anchor bolt edge distance, the least length measured from the edge of masonry to the surface
of
the anchor bolt
ld = required development length of reinforcement
L = actual length of wall
M = design moment
Mc = moment capacity of the compression steel in a flexural member about the centroid of the
tensile
force
Mcr = cracking moment strength of the masonry wall
Mm = the moment of the compressive force in the masonry about the centroid of the tensile force in
the reinforcement
Mn = nominal moment strength of the masonry wall

6‐366 Vol. 2
Masonry Structures Chapter 7

Ms = the moment of the tensile force in the reinforcement about the centroid of the compressive
force in the masonry
Mser = service moment at the mid‐height of the panel, including P‐Delta effects
Mu = factored moment
n = modular ratio = Es/Em
P = design axial load
Pa = allowable centroidal axial load for reinforced masonry columns
Pb = nominal balanced design axial strength
Pf = load from tributary floor or roof area
Po = nominal axial load strength with bending
Pu = factored axial load
Puf = factored load from tributary floor or roof loads
Puw = factored weight of the wall tributary to the section under consideration
Pw = weight of the wall tributary to the section under consideration
rb = ratio of the area of bars cut off to the total area of bars at the section
s = spacing of stirrups or bent bars in a direction parallel to that of the main reinforcement
S = section modulus
t = effective thickness of a wythe, wall or column
u = bond stress per unit of surface area of bar
V = total design shear force
Vn = nominal shear strength
Vm = nominal shear strength provided by masonry
Vs = nominal shear strength provided by shear reinforcement
∆u = horizontal deflection at mid‐height under factored load; P‐Delta effects shall be included in
deflection calculation
ρ = steel ratio = As/bd
ρn = ratio of distributed shear reinforcement on a plane perpendicular to the plane of Amv
∑o = sum of the perimeters of all the longitudinal reinforcement
ø = strength reduction factor.
7.1.3 Definitions
For the purpose of this chapter, the following definitions shall be applicable.
BED BLOCK : A block bedded on a wall, column or pier to disperse a concentrated load on a masonry
element.
BED JOINT : A horizontal mortar joint upon which masonry units are placed.
BOND : Arrangement of masonry units in successive courses to tie the masonry together both
longitudinally and transversely; the arrangement is usually worked out to ensure that no vertical joint of
one course is exactly over the one in the next course above or below it and there is maximum possible
amount of lap.
BOND BEAM : A horizontal grouted element within masonry in which reinforcement is embedded.
BUTTRESS : A pier of masonry built as an integral part of wall and projecting from either or both
surfaces, decreasing in cross‐sectional area from base to top and conforming to the requirement of
Sec 4.3.3(c) (ii).
CAVITY WALL : A wall comprising two limbs each built‐up as single or multi‐wythe units and separated
by a 50‐115 mm wide cavity. The limbs are tied together by metal ties or bonding units for structural
integrity.

Part 6
Structural Design
CELL : A void space having a gross cross‐sectional area greater than 1000 mm2.
COLUMN: An isolated vertical load bearing member the width of which does not exceed three times the
thickness.
CROSS JOINT: A vertical joint normal to the face of the wall.
CROSS‐SECTIONAL AREA OF MASONRY UNIT: Net cross‐sectional area of masonry unit is the gross
cross‐sectional area minus the area of cellular space.
CURTAIN WALL: A non load bearing self supporting wall subject to transverse lateral loads, and laterally
supported by vertical or horizontal structural member where necessary.
DIMENSIONS :
Actual dimensions ‐ the measured dimensions of a designated item; such as a designated masonry unit
or wall used in the structures. The actual dimension shall not vary from the specified dimension by
more than the amount allowed in the appropriate standard mentioned in Sec 2.2.4 of Part 5.
Nominal dimensions; specified dimensions plus the thickness of the joint with which the unit is laid.
Specified dimensions ‐ the dimensions specified for the manufacture or construction of masonry,
masonry units, joints or any other components of a structure. Unless otherwise stated, all calculations
shall be made using or based on specified dimensions.
FACED WALL: A wall in which facing and backing of two different materials are bonded together to
ensure common action under load.
GROUT : A mixture of cementitious materials and aggregate to which water is added such that the
mixture will flow without segregation of the constituents.
GROUTED MASONRY :
Grouted hollow‐unit masonry ‐ that form of grouted masonry construction in which certain designated
cells of hollow units are continuously filled with grout.
Grouted multi‐wythe masonry ‐ that form of grouted masonry construction in which the space between
the wythes is solidly or periodically filled with grout.
HOLLOW UNIT: A masonry unit of which net cross‐sectional area in any plane parallel to the bearing
surface is less than 75 per cent of its gross cross‐sectional area measured in the same plane.
JAMB : Side of an opening in wall.
JOINTS :
Bed joints ; the mortar joint that is horizontal at the time the masonry units are placed.
Collar joint ; the vertical, longitudinal, mortar or grouted joints.
Head joint ; the mortar joint having a vertical transverse plane.
LATERAL SUPPORT : A support which enables a masonry element to resist lateral load and/or restrains
lateral deflection of a masonry element at the point of support.
LIMB : Inner or outer portion of a cavity wall.
LOAD BEARING WALL : A wall designed to carry an imposed vertical load in addition to its own weight,
together with any lateral load.
MASONRY : An assemblage of masonry units properly bonded together with mortar.
MASONRY UNIT : Individual units, such as brick, tile, stone or concrete block, which are bonded
together with mortar to form a masonry element such as walls, columns, piers, buttress, etc.
PANEL WALL : An exterior non load bearing wall in framed structure, supported at each storey but
subject to lateral loads.
PARTITION WALL : An interior non load bearing wall, one storey or part storey in height.
PIER : A projection from either or both sides of a wall forming an integral part of the wall and
conforming to the requirement of Sec 4.4.3.3.c(ii).
PILASTER : A thickened section forming integral part of a wall placed at intervals along the wall, to
increase the stiffness of the wall or to carry a vertical concentrated load. Thickness of a pier is the
overall thickness including the thickness of the wall or, when bounded into a limb of cavity wall, the
thickness obtained by treating that limb as an independent wall.

6‐368 Vol. 2

PRISM : An assemblage of masonry units bonded by mortar with or without grout used as a test
specimen for determining properties of masonry.
REINFORCED MASONRY : The masonry construction, in which reinforcement acting in conjunction with
the masonry is used to resist forces and is designed in accordance with Sec 4.6.
SHEAR WALL : A load bearing wall designed to carry horizontal forces acting in its own plane with or
without vertical imposed loads.
SOLID UNIT : A masonry unit whose net cross‐sectional area in any plane parallel to the bearing surface
is 75 per cent or more of the gross cross‐sectional area in the same plane.
STACK BOND : A bond in bearing and nonbearing walls, except veneered walls, in which less than 75 per
cent of the units in any transverse vertical plane lap the ends of the units below a distance less than
one‐half the height of the unit, or less than one‐fourth the length of the unit.
VENEERED WALL : A wall in which the facing is attached to the backing but not so bonded as to result in
a common action under load.
WALL JOINT : A vertical joint parallel to the face of the wall.
WALL TIE : A metal fastener which connects wythes of masonry to each other or to other materials.
WYTHE : Portion of a wall which is one masonry unit in thickness.
7.2 Materials
7.2.1 General
All materials used in masonry construction shall conform to the requirements specified in Part 5 of this Code. If
no requirements are specified for a material, quality shall be based on generally accepted good practice, subject
to the approval of the building official.
7.2.2 Masonry Units
The following types of masonry units which conform to the standards mentioned in Sec 2.2.4 of Part 5 may be
used in masonry construction:
(a) Common building clay bricks
(b) Burnt clay hollow bricks
(c) Burnt clay facing bricks
(d) Hollow concrete blocks
Other types of masonry units conforming to Sec 2.2.4 of Part 5 may also be used.
7.2.3 Mortar and Grout
Mortar and grout for masonry construction shall conform to the requirements specified in Part 5. Mix
proportions and compressive strength of some commonly used mortars are given in Table 6.7.1.
7.3 Allowable STRESSES
7.3.1 General
Stresses in masonry shall not exceed the values given in this section. All allowable stresses for working stress
design may be increased one third when considering wind or earthquake forces either acting alone or combined
with vertical loads. No increase shall be allowed for vertical loads acting alone.
7.3.2 Specified Compressive Strength of Masonry, f ′m
The allowable stresses for masonry construction shall be based on the value of f m′ as determined by Sec 7.3.3
below.

Part 6
Structural Design
Table 6.7.1: Mix Proportion and Strength of Commonly used Mortars
Grade of Mix Proportion by Volume 1,2 Minimum Compressive

Mortar Strength at 28 days,
N/mm2
Cement Sand
M1 3 10
M2 4 7.5
M3 1 5 5
M4 6 3
M5 7 2
M6 8 1
1. Sand and cement shall be measured in loose volume and sand shall be well graded with a
minimum F.M. of 1.2.
2 . Lime to a maximum of 1 th part by volume of cement may be used to increase workability.
4
7.3.3 Compliance with
Compliance with the requirements for the specified compressive strength of masonry, f m′ shall be in accordance
with the following:
7.3.3.1 Masonry Prism Testing : The compressive strength of masonry based on tests at 28 days in
accordance with "Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Masonry Prisms", (ASTM E447)
′ . Verification by masonry prism testing shall meet the
for each set of prisms shall equal or exceed f m
following :
(a) Testing Prior to Construction: A set of five masonry prisms shall be built and tested in
accordance with ASTM E447 prior to the start of construction. Materials used for prisms
shall be same as used in the project. Prisms shall be constructed under the observation of
the engineer or an approved agency and tested by an approved agency.
(b) Testing During Construction: When full allowable stresses are used in design, a set of
three prisms shall be built and tested during construction in accordance with (ASTM E447)
for each 500 square meters of wall area, but not less than one set of three masonry
prisms for any project. No testing during construction shall be required when 50% of the
allowable stresses are used in design.
7.3.4 Quality Control
Quality control shall include, but not be limited to assure that:
(a) Masonry units, reinforcement, cement, lime, aggregate and all other materials meet the
requirements of the applicable standard of quality and that they are properly stored and
prepared for use.
(b) Mortar and grout are properly mixed using specified proportions of ingredients. The method of
measuring materials for mortar and grout shall be such that proportions of materials are
controlled.
(c) Construction details, procedures and workmanship are in accordance with the plans and
specification.
(d) Placement, splices and bar diameters are in accordance with the provisions of this chapter and
the plans and specifications.
7.3.5 Allowable Stresses in Masonry
When the quality control provisions specified in Sec 7.3.4 above do not include requirements for special
inspection, the allowable design stresses in this section shall be reduced by 50 per cent.
(a) Compressive Stress, Axial

6‐370 Vol. 2

i) Unreinforced masonry walls, columns and reinforced masonry wall
f m′ ⎡ ⎛ h′ ⎞ ⎤
3
Fa = ⎢1 − ⎜ ⎟⎥ (7.3.1)
5 ⎣⎢ ⎝ 42t ⎠ ⎦⎥

ii) Reinforced masonry columns
⎛ f m′ ⎞ ⎡ ⎛ h′ ⎞ ⎤
3
As
Fa = ⎜⎜ + Fsc ⎟⎟ ⎢1 − ⎜ ⎟⎥ (7.3.2)

⎝ 5 1.5 Ae ⎠ ⎢⎣ ⎝ 42t ⎠ ⎦⎥

(b) Compressive Stress, Flexural
Fb = 0.33 f m
′ ≤ 10N mm 2 (7.3.3)

(c) Tensile Stress for Walls, Flexure
The allowable tensile stress for walls in flexure of masonry structures without tensile
reinforcement using mortar Type M1 or M2 shall not exceed the values specified in Tables
6.7.2 and 6.7.3. For Type M3 and M4 mortar, the value shall be reduced by 25 per cent.
No tension is allowed across head joints in stack bond masonry. Values for tension normal
to head joints are for running bond. These values shall not be used for horizontal flexural
members such as beams, girders or lintels.
Table 6.7.2 : Flexural Tension, Ft
Masonry Normal to Bed Joints Normal to Head Joints

N/mm2 N/mm2
Solid Units 0.20 0.40
Hollow Units 0.12 0.25

Table 6.7.3 : Tension Normal to Head Joints, Ft
Masonry Clay Units Concrete Units

N/mm2 N/mm2
Solid Units 0.35 0.40
Hollow Units 0.22 0.25
(d) Reinforcing Bond Stress, u
Plain Bars 0.30 N/mm2
Deformed Bars 1.0 N/mm2
(e) Shear Stress for Flexural Members, Fv
i) When no shear reinforcement is used
Fv = 0.083 f m′ ≤ 0.25 N/mm2 (7.3.4)

ii) When shear reinforcement is designed to take entire shear force
Fv = 0.25 f m′ ≤ 0.75 N/mm2 (7.3.5)
(f) Shear Stress for Shear Walls, Fv
i) Unreinforced masonry
For clay units:

Part 6
Structural Design
Fv = 0.025 f m′ ≤ 0.40 N/mm2 (7.3.6)
For concrete units :
M1 or M2 Mortar 0.20 N/mm2
M3 Mortar 0.12 N/mm2
ii) The allowable shear stress for reinforced masonry shear walls shall be according to Table 6.7.4.
7.3.6 Allowable Stresses in Reinforcement
(a) Tensile Stress
i Deformed bars,
Fs = 0.5 f y , ≤ 165 N/mm2 (7.3.7)
ii) Ties, anchors and plain bars,
Fs = 0.4 f y , ≤ 135 N/mm2 (7.3.8)
Table 6.7.4: Allowable Shear Stress for Reinforced Masonry Shear Walls, Fv
M/Vd Fv, N/mm2 Maximum Allowable

N/mm2
1 ⎛ M⎞ ⎛ M⎞
⎜4 − ⎟ f m′ ⎜ 0.4 − 0.2 ⎟
Masonry < 1 36 ⎝ Vd ⎠ ⎝ Vd ⎠
taking all
shear
≥ 1 0.083 f m′ 0.17
Reinforceme 1 ⎛ M⎞ ⎛ M⎞
⎜4 − ⎟ f m′ ⎜ 0.6 − 0.2 ⎟
nt taking all < 1 24 ⎝ Vd ⎠ ⎝ Vd ⎠
shear
≥ 1 0.125 f m′ 0.37
(b) Compressive Stress
i) Deformed bars in columns and shear walls,
Fsc = 0.4 f y ≤ 165 N/mm2 (7.3.9)
ii) Deformed bars in flexural members
Fsc = 0.5 f y ≤ 165 N/mm2 (7.3.10)
7.3.7 Combined Compressive Stress
Members subject to combined axial and flexural stresses shall be designed in accordance with accepted
principles of mechanics or in accordance with the following formula:
fa f
+ b ≤1 (7.3.11)
Fa Fb
7.3.8 Modulus of Elasticity
The modulus of elasticity of masonry shall be determined by the secant method. The slope of the line
connecting the points 0.05 f m′ and 0.33 f m′ on the stress‐strain curve shall be taken as the modulus of elasticity

6‐372 Vol. 2

of masonry. If required, actual values shall be established by tests. These values are not to be reduced by 50
per cent as specified in Sec 7.3.5(a).
(a) Modulus of Elasticity for Masonry
E m =750 f m′ ≤ 15,000 N/mm2 (7.3.12)
(b) Modulus of Elasticity for Steel
Es = 200,000 N/mm2 (7.3.13)
(c) Shear Modulus of Masonry
G = 0.4 Em (7.3.14)
7.3.9 Shear and Tension on Embedded Anchor Bolts
7.3.9.1 Allowable loads and placement requirements for anchor bolts shall be in accordance with the
following:
(a) Bent bar anchor bolts shall have a hook with a 90 degree bend with an inside diameter of 3db
plus an extension of 1.5db at the free end.
(b) Headed anchor bolts shall have a standard bolt head.
(c) Plate anchor bolts shall have a plate welded to the shank to provide anchorage equivalent to
headed anchor bolts.
7.3.9.2 The effective embedment length, l b for bent bar anchors shall be the length of embedment
measured perpendicular from the surface of the masonry to the bearing surface of the bent end
minus one anchor bolt diameter. For plate or headed anchor bolts l b shall be the length of
embedment measured perpendicular from the surface of the masonry to the bearing surface of the
plate or head of the anchorage. All bolts shall be grouted in place with at least 25 mm of grout
between the bolt and the masonry except that 6 mm diameter bolts may be placed in bed joints
which are at least twice as thick as the diameter of the bolt.
7.3.9.3 Allowable Shear Force
Allowable loads in shear shall be according to Table 6.7.5 or lesser of the value obtained from the
following formulae:
Bv = 1070( f m′ Ab )
1/ 4
(7.3.15)
Bv = 0.12 Ab f y (7.3.16)
When the distance l be is less than 12 db, the value of Bv in Eq (7.3.15) shall be reduced to zero at a
distance l be equal to 40 mm. Where adjacent anchors are spaced closer than 8db, the allowable
shear of the adjacent anchors determined by Eq (7.3.15) shall be reduced by interpolation to 0.75
times the allowable shear value at a centre to centre spacing of 4 db.
Table 6.7.5 : Allowable Shear, Bv for Embedded Anchor Bolts for Masonry, kN*
Bent Bar Anchor Bolt Diameter, mm
′
fm
N/mm2 10 12 16 20 22 25 28
10 2.0 3.7 5.9 7.9 8.5 9.1 9.6
12 2.0 3.7 5.9 8.2 8.3 9.5 10.1
13 2.0 3.7 5.9 8.5 9.2 9.8 10.4
17 2.0 3.7 5.9 8.5 9.7 10.3 11.0

Part 6
Structural Design
′
fm
N/mm2 10 12 16 20 22 25 28
20 2.0 3.7 5.9 8.5 10.1 10.8 11.5
27 2.0 3.7 5.9 8.5 10.9 11.6 12.3
* Values are for bolts of at least ASTM A307 quality. Bolts shall be those specified in Sec
4.3.9.1.
7.3.9.4 Allowable Tension
Allowable tension shall be the lesser value selected from Table 6.7.6 and Table 6.7.7 or shall be
determined from lesser of the values obtained from the following formulae:
Bt = 0.04 A p f m′ (7.3.17)
Bt = 0.2 Ab f y (7.3.18)
The area Ap shall be the lesser of the area obtained from Eq (7.3.17) and (7.3.18) and where the
projected areas of adjacent anchor bolts overlap, Ap of each anchor bolt shall be reduced by 50 per
cent of the overlapping area.
A p = πl b
2
(7.3.19)
A p = πl be (7.3.20)
2

Table 6.7.6: Allowable Tension, Bt for Embedded Anchor Bolts for Masonry, kN 1, 2
Embedment Length, lb, or Edge Distance, lbe, mm
′
fm
N/mm2 50 75 100 125 150 200 250
10 1.0 2.4 4.3 6.7 9.7 17.3 27.0
12 1.2 2.6 4.7 7.4 10.6 18.9 29.6
13 1.2 2.8 5.0 7.8 11.2 20.0 31.2
17 1.3 3.1 5.6 8.7 12.6 22.4 35.0
20 1.5 3.4 6.7 9.5 13.8 24.5 38.2
27 1.7 3.9 7.0 11.0 15.9 28.3 44.1
1 The allowable tension values are based on compressive strength of masonry assemblages. Where yield
strength of anchor bolt steel governs, the allowable tension is given in Table 6.7.7.
2 Values are for bolts of at least ASTM A307 quality. Bolts shall be those specified in Sec 7.3.9.1.
Table 6.7.7 : Allowable Tension, Bt for Embedded Anchor Bolts for Masonry, kN 1
6 10 12 16 20 22 25 28
1.5 3.5 6.2 9.8 14.1 19.2 25.1 31.8
1 Values are for bolts of at least ASTM A307 quality. Bolts shall be those specified in Sec 7.3.9.
7.3.9.5 Combined Shear and Tension
Anchor bolts subjected to combined shear and tension shall be designed in accordance with the
formula given below:

6‐374 Vol. 2

bt bv
+ ≤ 1.00 7.3.22
Bt Bv
7.3.9.6 Minimum Edge Distance, l be
The minimum value of l be measured from the edge of the masonry parallel to the anchor bolt to the
surface of the anchor bolt shall be 40 mm.
7.3.9.7 Minimum Embedment Depth, l b

The minimum embedment depth l b shall be 4db but not less than 50 mm.
7.3.9.8 Minimum Spacing Between Bolts
The minimum centre to centre spacing between anchors shall be 4db .
7.3.10 Load Test
For load test, the member shall be subject to a superimposed load equal to twice the design live load plus one‐
half of the dead load. This load shall be maintained for a period of 24 hours. If, during the test or upon removal
of the load, the member shows evidence of failure, such changes or modifications as are necessary to make the
structure adequate for the rated capacity shall be made; or where possible, a lower rating shall be established. A
flexural member shall be considered to have passed the test if the maximum deflection at the end of the 24
2
hour period neither exceeds 0.005 l nor 0.00025 l t and the beam and slabs show a recovery of at least 75 per
cent of the observed deflection within 24 hours after removal of the load.
7.3.11 Reuse of Masonry Units
Masonry units may be reused when clean, unbroken and conforms to the requirements of Part 5. All structural
properties of masonry of reclaimed units, especially adhesion bond, shall be determined by approved test. The
allowable working stress shall not exceed 50 per cent of that permitted for new masonry units of the same
properties.
7.4 BASIC DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
7.4.1 General
Masonry structures shall be designed according to the provisions of this section. The required design strengths
of masonry materials and any special requirements shall be specified in the plan submitted for approval.
7.4.2 Design Considerations
7.4.2.1 Masonry structures shall be designed based on working stress and linear stress‐strain distribution.
Requirements for working stress design of unreinforced and reinforced masonry structures are
provided in Sec 4.5 and 4.6 respectively. In lieu of the working stress design method, slender walls and
shear walls may be designed by the strength design method specified in Sec 7.7.
The structure shall be proportioned such that eccentricity of loading on the members is as small as

possible. Eccentric loading shall preferably be avoided by providing:
(a) adequate bearing of floor/roof on the walls
(b) adequate stiffness in slabs, and
(c) fixity at the supports.

Part 6
Structural Design
7.4.2.2 Effective Height
(a) Wall : The effective height of a wall shall be taken as the clear height between the lateral
supports at top and bottom in a direction normal to the axis considered. For members not
supported at the top normal to the axis considered, the effective height is twice the height of
the member above the support. Effective height less than the clear height may be used if
justified.
(b) Column : Effective height of the column shall be taken as actual height for the direction it is
laterally supported and twice the actual height for the direction it is not laterally supported
at the top normal to the axis considered.
(c) Opening in Wall : When openings occur in a wall such that masonry between the openings is
by definition a column, effective height of masonry between the openings shall be obtained
as follows:
i) When wall has full restraint at the top, effective height for the direction
perpendicular to the plane of wall equals 0.75H plus 0.25H', where H is the
distance between supports and H' is the height of the taller opening; and
effective height for the direction parallel to the wall equals H.
ii) When wall has partial restraint at the top and bottom, effective height for the
direction perpendicular to the plane of wall equals H when height of neither
opening exceeds 0.5H and it is equal to 2H when height of any opening exceeds
0.5H; and effective height for the direction parallel to the plane of the wall
equals 2H.
7.4.2.3 Effective Length
Effective length of a wall for different support conditions shall be as given in Table 6.7.8.
7.4.2.4 Effective Thickness
The effective thickness of walls and columns for use in the calculation of slenderness ratio, shall be
defined as follows:
(a) Solid Walls: The effective thickness of solid walls, faced walls or grouted walls shall be the
specified thickness of the wall.
(b) Solid Walls with Raked Mortar Joints: The effective thickness of solid walls with raked
mortar joints shall be the minimum thickness measured at the joint.
(c) Cavity Walls: When both limbs of a cavity wall are axially loaded, each limb shall be
considered independently and the effective thickness of each limb shall be determined as in
(a) or (b) above. If one of the limbs is axially loaded, the effective thickness of the cavity wall
shall be taken as the square root of the sum of the squares of the effective thicknesses of
the limbs.
(d) Walls Stiffened by Pilasters: When solid or cavity walls are stiffened by pilasters at intervals,
the effective thickness to be used for the calculation of h'/t ratio shall be determined as
follows:
i) Solid Walls: For stiffened solid walls the effective thickness shall be the specified
thickness multiplied by the stiffening coefficient, k, values of which are given below:
Stiffening Coefficient, k *
l p wp t p tw

1 2 3
6 1.0 1.4 2.0
8 1.0 1.3 1.7
10 1.0 1.2 1.4
15 1.0 1.1 1.2
20 or more 1.0 1.0 1.0

6‐376 Vol. 2

* Linear interpolation is permitted for obtaining intermediate values of k
where, l p = centre to centre spacing of pilasters
tp = thickness of pilaster including the wall
tw = specified thickness of main wall
wp = width of pilaster in the direction of wall
ii) Cavity Walls: When one or both limbs of a cavity wall are adequately bonded into
pilasters at intervals, the effective thickness of each limb shall be determined
separately as in (a), (b) or d(i) above and the effective thickness of the stiffened cavity
wall shall be determined in accordance with (c) above.
Where slenderness ratio of the wall is based on the effective length, the effective
thickness shall be the same as that without pilasters.
(e) Columns: The effective thickness for rectangular columns in the direction considered is the
actual thickness provided in that direction. The effective thickness for nonrectangular columns
is the thickness of a square column with the same moment of inertia about its axis as that
about the axis considered in the actual column.
Table 6.7.8: Effective Length of Walls
Support Condition Effective Length
Where a wall is continuous and is supported by cross wall and there
is no opening within a distance of H/8 from the face of cross wall, 0.8L
Or
Where a wall is continuous and is supported by pier/buttresses
conforming to Sec 7.4.3.3 (c) (ii).
Where a wall is supported by cross wall at one end and continuous
with cross wall at other end, 0.9L
Or
Where a wall is supported by pier/buttresses at one end and
continuous with pier/buttresses at other end conforming to
Sec 7.4.3.3 (c) (ii).

Where a wall is supported at each end by cross wall,
Or 1.0L
Where a wall is supported at each end by pier/buttresses
conforming to Sec 7.4.3.3 (c) (ii).

Where a wall is free at one end and continuous with a cross wall at
the other end, 1.5L
Or
Where a wall is free at one end and continuous with a
pier/buttresses at the other end conforming to Sec 7.4.3.3 (c) (ii).

Where a wall is free at one end and supported at the other end by
a cross wall, 2.0L
Or
Where a wall is free at one end and supported at the other end by a
pier/buttresses conforming to Sec 7.4.3.3 (c) (ii).

Part 6
Structural Design
7.4.2.5 Slenderness Ratio
(a) Walls: For a wall, slenderness ratio shall be the ratio of effective height to effective
thickness or effective length to effective thickness whichever less is. In case of a load
bearing wall, slenderness ratio shall not exceed 20.
(b) Column: For a column, slenderness ratio shall be taken to be the greater of the ratio of
effective heights to the respective effective thickness in the two principal directions.
Slenderness ratio for a load bearing column shall not exceed 12.
7.4.2.6 Effective Area
The effective cross‐sectional area shall be based on the minimum bedded area of the hollow units, or
the gross area of solid units plus any grouted area. If hollow units are used perpendicular to the
direction of stress, the effective area shall be lesser of the minimum bedded area or the minimum
cross‐sectional area. If bed joints are raked, the effective area shall be correspondingly reduced.
Effective areas for cavity walls shall be that of the loaded wythes.
7.4.2.7 Flexural Resistance of Cavity Walls
For computing the flexural resistance, lateral loads perpendicular to the plane of the wall shall be
distributed to the wythes according to their respective flexural rigidities.
7.4.2.8 Effective Width of Intersecting Walls
Where a shear wall is anchored to an intersecting wall or walls, the width of the overhanging flange
formed by the intersected walls on either side of the shear wall shall not exceed 6 times the thickness
of the intersected wall. Limits of the effective flange may be waived if justified. Only the effective
area of the wall parallel to the shear forces may be assumed to carry horizontal shear.
7.4.3 Supports
7.4.3.1 Vertical Support
Structural members providing vertical support of masonry shall provide a bearing surface on which
the initial bed joint shall not be less than 6 mm or more than 25 mm and shall be of noncombustible
materials, except where masonry is a nonstructural decorative feature or wearing surface.
7.4.3.2 Vertical Deflection
Elements supporting masonry shall be designed so that their vertical deflection does not exceed
1/600 of the clear span under total loads. Lintels shall be supported on each end such that allowable
stresses in the supporting masonry are not exceeded. The minimum bearing length shall be 100 mm.
7.4.3.3 Lateral Support
(a) Lateral support of masonry may be provided by cross walls, columns, piers, counter forts or
buttresses when spanning horizontally or by floors, beams or roofs when spanning
vertically.
(b) Lateral supports for a masonry element such as load bearing wall or column shall be
provided to
i) limit the slenderness of a masonry element so as to prevent or reduce possibility of
buckling of the member due to vertical loads; and
ii) resist the horizontal components of forces so as to ensure stability of a structure
against overturning.
(c) From consideration of slenderness (i.e. requirement b(i) above), masonry elements may be
considered to be laterally supported if
i) in case of a wall, where slenderness ratio is based on effective height, floor/roof slab
(or beams and slab) irrespective of the direction of span, bears on the supported wall
as well as cross walls, to the extent of at least 100 mm;

6‐378 Vol. 2

ii) in case of a wall, when slenderness ratio is based on its effective length, a cross
wall/pier/buttress of thickness equal to or more than half the thickness of the
supported wall or 125 mm, whichever is more and average length equal to or more
than one‐fifth of the height of the wall, is built at right angle to the wall and properly
bonded;
iii) in case of a column, an RC or timber beam/R S joist/roof truss, is supported on the
column. In this case, the column will not be considered to be laterally supported in the
direction at right angle to it; and
iv) in case of a column, an RC beam forming a part of beam and slab construction, is
supported on the column, and the slab adequately bears on stiffening walls. This
construction will provide lateral support to the column, in the direction of both
horizontal axes.
7.4.4 Stability
A wall or column subject to vertical and lateral loads may be considered to provide adequate lateral support
from consideration of stability, if the construction providing the support is capable of resisting the following
forces:
(a) Simple static reactions at the point of lateral support to all the lateral loads; plus
(b) A lateral load equal to 2.5% of the total vertical load that the wall or column is
designated to carry at the point of lateral support.
7.4.4.1 In case of load bearing buildings up to five storeys, stability requirements may be considered to have
been satisfied if the following conditions are met.
(a) Height to width ratio of building does not exceed 2.
(b) Cross walls acting as stiffening walls continuous from outer wall to outer wall or outer wall to a
load bearing inner wall, and of thickness and spacing as given in Table 6.7.9 are provided.
Note : If stiffening wall or walls that are in a line, are interrupted by openings, length of solid wall or walls in the zone of the
wall that is to be stiffened shall be at least one‐fifth of the height of the opening.
(c) Floors and roof either bear on cross walls or are properly anchored to those walls such that all
lateral loads are safely transmitted to those walls and through them to the foundation.
(d) Cross walls are built jointly with the bearing walls and jointly mortared, or interconnected by
toothing.
Note : Cross walls may be anchored to walls to be supported by ties of noncorrosive metal of minimum section 6 x 35 mm and
length 60 mm with ends bent at least 50 mm, maximum vertical spacing of ties being 1.2 m.
Table 6.7.9: Thickness and Spacing of Stiffening Walls
Stiffening Wall *
Thickness of Storey Height Thickness not less than Maximum
Load not spacing
Bearing Wall to to Exceed
be
Stiffened 1 to 3 4 and 5
(mm) (m) storeys storeys (m)
(mm) (mm)
100 3.2 100 ‐ 4.5
200 3.2 100 200 6.0
300 3.4 100 200 8.0
above 300 5.0 100 200 8.0
* Storey height and maximum spacing as given are centre to centre dimensions.

Part 6
Structural Design
7.4.4.2 In case of walls exceeding 8.0 m in length, safety and adequacy of lateral supports shall always be
checked by structural analysis.
7.4.4.3 A trussed roofing may not provide lateral support unless special measures are adopted to brace and
anchor the roofing. However, in case of residential and similar buildings of conventional design with
trussed roofing having cross walls, it may be assumed that stability requirements are met by the cross
walls and structural analysis for stability may be dispensed with.
7.4.4.4 In case of walls exceeding 8.0 m in length, safety and adequacy of lateral supports shall always be
checked by structural analysis.
7.4.4.5 A trussed roofing may not provide lateral support unless special measures are adopted to brace and
anchor the roofing. However, in case of residential and similar buildings of conventional design with
trussed roofing having cross walls, it may be assumed that stability requirements are met by the cross
walls and structural analysis for stability may be dispensed with.
7.4.4.6 In case of external walls of basement and plinth, stability requirements of Sec 7.4.4 may be
considered to be satisfied if :
(a) Bricks used in basement and plinth have a minimum crushing strength of 5 N/mm2 and mortar
used in masonry is of Type M3 or better,
(b) Clear height of ceiling in basement does not exceed 2.6 m,
(c) In the zone of action of soil pressure on basement walls, traffic load excluding any surcharge
due to adjoining buildings does not exceed 5 kN/m2,
(d) Minimum thickness of basement walls is in accordance with Table 6.7.10.
In case there is surcharge on basement walls from adjoining buildings, thickness of basement walls
shall be based on structural analysis.
Table 6.7.10: Minimum Thickness of Basement Wall
Minimum Thickness of Height of the Ground above Basement
Basement Wall Floor Level with Wall Loading
(Nominal), mm (Permanent Load), m
Less than 50 kN/m More than 50 kN/m
375 2.0 2.5

250 1.4 1.8

7.4.4.7 Free Standing Wall
Free standing walls, subject to wind pressure or seismic forces shall be designed on the basis of
permissible tensile stress in masonry or stability consideration. However in Seismic Zones 1 and 2,
free standing walls may be proportioned without making any design calculations with the help of
Table 6.7.11 provided the mortar used is of type not leaner than M3. For parapet wall see Sec 7.4.9.4.
7.4.5 Structural Continuity
Intersecting structural elements intended to act as a unit shall be anchored together to resist the design forces.
Walls shall be anchored together to all floors, roofs or other elements which provide lateral support for the wall.
Where floors or roofs are designed to transmit horizontal forces to walls, the anchorages to the walls shall be
designed to resist the horizontal forces.

6‐380 Vol. 2

Table 6.7.11: Height to Thickness Ratio of Free Standing Wall
Design Wind Pressure, N/m2 Height to Thickness Ratio
Up to 300 10
600 7
900 5
1100 4
Note : Height is to be taken from 150 mm below ground level or top of footing/foundation
block, whichever is higher, and up to the top edge of the wall.
7.4.5.1 Multi‐wythe Walls
All wythes shall be bonded by grout or tied together by corrosion resistant wall ties or joint
reinforcement as follows:
(a) Wall Ties in Cavity Wall Construction: Wall ties shall be of sufficient length to engage all
wythes. The portion of the wall ties within the wythe shall be completely embedded in
mortar or grout. The ends of the wall ties shall be bent to 90 degree angles with an
extension not less than 50 mm long. Wall ties not completely embedded in mortar or grout
between wythes shall be a single piece with each end engaged in each wythe.
There shall be at least one 6 mm diameter wall tie for each 0.45 m2 of wall area. For cavity
walls in which the width of the cavity is greater than 75 mm, but not more than 115 mm, at
least one 6 mm diameter wall tie for each 0.3 m2 of wall area shall be provided.
Ties in alternate courses shall be staggered. The vertical distance between ties shall not
exceed 600 mm. The horizontal distance between ties shall not exceed 900 mm.
Additional ties spaced not more than 900 mm apart shall be provided around and within
300 mm of the opening.
Wall ties of different size and spacing may be used if they provide equivalent strength
between wythes.

(b) Wall Ties for Grouted Multi‐wythe Construction: The two wythes shall be bonded together
with at least 6 mm diameter steel wall ties for each 0.20 m2 of area. Wall ties of different
size and spacing may be used if they provide equivalent strength between wythes.
(c) Joint Reinforcement: Prefabricated joint reinforcement for masonry walls shall have a
minimum of one cross wire of at least 3 mm diameter steel for each 0.2 m2 of wall area. The
vertical spacing of the joint reinforcement shall not exceed 400 mm. The longitudinal wires
shall be thoroughly embedded in the bed joint mortar. The joint reinforcement shall engage
all wythes.
Where the space between tied wythes is filled with grout or mortar, the allowable stresses
and other provisions for masonry bonded walls shall apply. Where the space is not filled,
tied walls shall conform to the allowable stress, lateral support, thickness (excluding cavity),
height and tie requirements of cavity walls.
7.4.6 Joint Reinforcement and Protection of Ties
The minimum mortar cover between ties or joint reinforcement and any exposed face shall be 15 mm. The
thickness of grout or mortar between masonry units and joint reinforcement shall not be less than 6 mm, except
that smaller diameter reinforcement or bolts may be placed in bed joints which are at least twice as thick as the
diameter of the reinforcement.
7.4.7 Pipes and Conduits
Pipe or conduit shall not be embedded in any masonry so as to reduce the capacity to less than that necessary
for required stability or required fire protection, except the following:
(a) Rigid electrical conduit may be embedded in structural masonry when their location has been
detailed on the approved plan.

Part 6
Structural Design
(b) Any pipe or conduit may pass vertically or horizontally through any masonry by means of a sleeve
at least large enough to pass any hub or coupling on the pipeline. Such sleeves shall not be placed
closer than three diameters, centre to centre, nor shall they unduly impair the strength of
construction.
(c) Placement of pipes or conduits in unfilled cores of hollow unit masonry shall not be considered as
embedment.
7.4.8 Loads and Load Combination
7.4.8.1 Design Loads
All design loads and other forces to be taken for the design of masonry structures shall conform to
Chapter 2, Loads.
7.4.8.2 Load Dispersion
The angle of dispersion of vertical load on walls shall be taken as not more than 30o from the vertical.
7.4.8.3 Distribution of Concentrated Vertical Loads in Walls
The length of wall, laid up in running bond, which may be considered capable of working at the
maximum allowable compressive stresses to resist vertical concentrated loads, shall not exceed the
centre to centre distance between such loads, nor the width of bearing area plus four times the wall
thickness. Concentrated vertical loads shall not be assumed distributed across continuous vertical
mortar or control joints unless elements designed to distribute the concentrated vertical loads are
employed.
7.4.8.4 Loads on Nonbearing Wall
Masonry walls used as interior partition or as exterior surfaces of building which do not carry vertical
loads imposed by other elements of the building shall be designed to carry their own weight plus any
superimposed finish and lateral forces. Bonding or anchorage of nonbearing walls shall be adequate
to support the walls and to transfer lateral forces to the supporting structures.
7.4.8.5 Load Combinations
Load combination for design of masonry structures shall conform to the requirements of Sec 2.7.5.1.
7.4.9 Minimum Design Dimensions
7.4.9.1 Minimum Thickness of Load Bearing Walls
The nominal thickness of masonry bearing walls in building shall not be less than 250 mm.
Exception:
Stiffened solid masonry bearing walls in one‐storey buildings may have a minimum effective thickness of 165 mm when not
over 3 m in height, provided that when gable construction is used an additional 1.5 m height may be permitted at the peak of
the gable.
7.4.9.2 Variation in Thickness
When a change in thickness due to minimum thickness requirements occurs between floor levels, the
greater thickness shall be carried up to the higher floor level.
7.4.9.3 Decrease in Thickness
When walls of masonry of hollow units or masonry bonded hollow walls are decreased in thickness, a
course or courses of solid masonry shall be constructed between the walls below and the thinner wall
above, or special units or construction shall be used to transmit the loads from wythes to the walls
below.
7.4.9.4 Parapet Wall
Parapet walls shall be at least 200 mm thick and height shall not exceed 4 times the thickness. The
parapet wall shall not be thinner than the wall below.

6‐382 Vol. 2

7.5 DESIGN OF UNREINFORCED MASONRY
7.5.1 General
The requirements of this section are applicable to unreinforced masonry in addition to the requirements of
Sec 7.4.
7.5.2 Design of Members Subjected to Axial Compression
The stresses due to compressive forces applied at the centroid of any load bearing wall, column and pilaster
may be computed by Eq (7.5.1) below assuming uniform distribution over the effective area.
P
fa =
Ae 7.5.1
7.5.3
Design of Members Subjected to Combined Bending and Axial Compression
(a) Compressive stresses due to combined bending and axial load shall satisfy the requirements of
Sec 7.3.5.
(b) Resultant tensile stress due to combined bending and axial load shall not exceed the allowable
flexural tensile stress, Ft as specified in Sec 7.3.
7.5.4 Design of Members Subjected to Flexure
Stresses due to flexure calculated by Eq (7.5.2) below shall not exceed the values given in Sec 7.3.5.
Mc
fb =
I 7.5.2
7.5.5 Design of Members Subjected to Shear
Shear calculations in flexural members and shear walls shall be based on Eq (7.5.3) below.
V
fv =
Ae 7.5.3
7.5.6 Design of Arches
Geometrical form and the cross‐sectional dimensions of masonry arch shall be selected such that the line of
thrust at any section of the arch is kept within the middle third of the section of the arch rib. The elastic theory
of arches shall be permitted for the analysis of unreinforced masonry arches. All supports of arches shall be
capable of developing the required horizontal thrust without suffering unacceptable displacements. Every arch
must be designed to resist the stresses due to the following loads:
(a) Gravity Loads :
i. Dead loads shall be placed in conformity with their actual distribution.
ii. Live loads shall be positioned to cover entire span or part of the span as necessary to
produce the maximum stresses at the crown, springing and all other sections of the
arch rib.
(b) Loads due to temperature change.
(c) Shrinkage load due to setting and hardening.
(d) Shortening of arch rib under thrust caused by loads.
7.5.7 Footings and Corbels
The slope of footing and corbelling (measured from the horizontal to the face of the corbelled surface) shall not
be less than 60 degrees.
The maximum horizontal projection of corbelling from the plane of the wall shall be such that stress at any
section does not exceed the allowable value.

Part 6
Structural Design
7.6 DESIGN OF REINFORCED MASONRY
7.6.1 General
The requirements of this section are in addition to those specified in Sec 7.4 and are applicable to reinforced
masonry. Plain bars larger than 6 mm in diameter shall not be used.
7.6.1.1 Assumptions
The following assumptions shall be applicable for this section.
(a) Masonry carries no tensile stress.
(b) Reinforcement is completely surrounded by and bonded to masonry material so that they work
together as a homogeneous material within the range of working stresses.
7.6.2 Design of Members Subjected to Axial Compression
Stresses due to compressive forces applied at the centroid of load bearing wall, column and pilaster may be
computed assuming uniform distribution over the effective area. Stress shall be calculated from Eq (7.6.1)
below:
P
fa =
Ae 7.6.1
7.6.3 Design of Members Subjected to Combined Bending and Axial Compression
Stress due to combined bending and axial loads shall satisfy the requirements of Sec 7.3.5. Columns and walls
subjected to bending with or without axial loads shall meet all applicable requirements for flexural design.
The design of walls with an (h//t) ratio larger than 30 shall be based on forces and moments determined from
analysis of structure. Such analysis shall take into account influence of axial loads and variable moment of
inertia on member stiffness and fixed end moments, effect of deflections on moments and forces, and the
effects of duration of loads.
7.6.4 Design of Members Subjected to Shear Force
Shearing stresses in flexural members and shear walls shall be computed by
V
fv =
bjd 7.6.2
When the computed shear stress exceeds the allowable value, web reinforcement shall be provided and
designed to carry the total shear force. Both vertical and horizontal shear stresses shall be considered. The area
required for shear reinforcement placed perpendicular to the longitudinal reinforcement shall be computed by
Eq (7.6.3) below:
sV
Av =
Fs d 7.6.3
Spacing of vertical shear reinforcement shall not exceed d/2, nor 600 mm. Inclined shear reinforcement shall
have a maximum spacing of 0.375 d (1+ cot α), but not greater than 600 mm, where α is the acute angle
between inclined bar and the horizontal.
7.6.5 Design of Members Subjected to Flexural Stress
7.6.5.1 Rectangular Elements
Rectangular flexural elements shall be designed in accordance with the following equations or other
methods based on the simplified assumptions.
(a) Compressive stress in the masonry:
M ⎛ 2 ⎞
fb = ⎜ ⎟
bd 2 ⎜⎝ jk ⎟⎠ 7.6.4

6‐384 Vol. 2

(b) Tensile stress in the longitudinal reinforcement:
M
fs =
As jd 7.6.5
(c) Design coefficients :
[
k = (np ) + 2np
2
]
1/ 2
− np 7.6.6
or
1
k=
fs 7.6.7
1+
nf b
k
j = 1− 7.6.8
3
7.6.5.2 Nonrectangular Sections
Flexural elements of nonrectangular cross‐section shall be designed in accordance with the
assumptions given in Sec 7.4.2.1 and 7.6.1.1.
7.6.5.3 Lateral Support
The clear distance between lateral supports of a beam shall not exceed 32 times the least depth of
compression area.
7.6.5.4 Effective Width
In computing flexural stresses in walls where reinforcement occurs, the effective width assumed for
running bond masonry shall not exceed 6 times the nominal wall thickness or the centre to centre
distance between reinforcement. Where stack bond is used, the effective width shall not exceed 3
times the nominal wall thickness or the centre to centre distance between reinforcement or the
length of one unit, unless grouted solid using open‐ended joints.
7.6.5.5 Bond
In flexural members in which tensile reinforcement is parallel to the compressive face, the bond
stress shall be computed by the formula:
V
u=
∑ o jd
7.6.9
7.6.6 Reinforcement Requirements and Details
7.6.6.1 Column Reinforcement
(a) Vertical Reinforcement: The area of vertical reinforcement shall not be less than 0.005 Ae
and not more than 0.04Ae. At least four 10 mm φ bars shall be provided.
(b) Lateral Ties: All longitudinal bars for columns shall be enclosed by lateral ties. Lateral
support shall be provided to the longitudinal bars by the corner of a complete tie having an
included angle of not more than 135 degrees or by a hook at the end of a tie. The corner
bars shall have such support provided by a complete tie enclosing the longitudinal bars.
Alternate longitudinal bars shall have such lateral support provided by ties and no bar shall
be farther than 150 mm from such a laterally supported bar.
Lateral ties and longitudinal bars shall be placed not less than 40 mm and not more than
125 mm, from the surface of the column. Lateral ties may be against the longitudinal bars or
placed in the horizontal bed joint if the requirements of Sec 4.4.6 are met. Spacing of ties
shall not be more than 16 times longitudinal bar diameter, 48 times tie bar diameter or the
least dimension of the column but not more than 450 mm.

Part 6
Structural Design
Ties shall be at least 6 mm in diameter for 22 mm diameter or smaller longitudinal bars and
10 mm in diameter for larger longitudinal bars. Ties less than 10 mm in diameter may be
used for longitudinal bars larger than 22 mm in diameter, provided the total cross‐sectional
area of such smaller ties crossing a longitudinal plane is equal to that of the larger ties at
their required spacing.
(c) Anchor Bolt Ties: Additional ties shall be provided around anchor bolts which are set in the
top of the column. Such ties shall engage at least four bolts or, alternatively at least four
vertical column bars or a combination of bolts and bars totaling four in number. Such ties
shall be located within the top 125 mm of the column and shall provide a total of 250
square millimeters or more in cross‐sectional area. The upper most ties shall be within 50
mm of the top of the column.
7.6.6.2 Maximum Reinforcement Size
The maximum size of reinforcing bars shall be 35 mm. Maximum steel area in cell shall be 6 per cent
of the cell area without splices and 12 per cent of cell area with splices.
7.6.6.3 Spacing of Longitudinal Reinforcement
The clear distance between parallel bars, except in columns, shall not be less than the nominal
diameter of the bars or 25 mm, except that bars in a splice may be in contact. This clear distance
requirement applies to the clear distance between a contact splice and adjacent splices or bars. The
minimum clear distance between parallel bars in columns shall be two and one‐half times the bar
diameter.
The clear distance between the surface of a bar and any surface of a masonry unit shall not be less
than 6 mm for fine grout and 12 mm for coarse grout. Cross webs of hollow units may be used as
support for horizontal reinforcement.
All reinforcing bars, except joint reinforcing, shall be completely embedded in mortar or grout and
have a minimum cover, including the masonry unit, as specified below:
(a) 20 mm when not exposed to weather
(b) 40 mm when exposed to weather
(c) 50 mm when exposed to soil

7.6.6.4 Anchorage of Flexural Reinforcement
(a) The tension or compression in any bar at any section must be developed on each side of
that section by the required development length. The development length of the bar may
be achieved by a combination of an embedment length, anchorage or, for tension only,
hooks.
The required development length for deformed bars or deformed wires shall be calculated
by:
ld = 0.29db f s for bars in tension (7.6.10)
ld = 0.22db f s for bars in compression (7.6.11)

Development length for plain bars shall be 2.0 times the length calculated by Eq (7.6.10).

(b) Except at supports, or at the free end of cantilevers, every reinforcing bar shall be extended
beyond the point at which it is no longer needed to resist tensile stress for a distance equal
to 12 bar diameters or the depth of the flexural member, whichever is greater. No flexural
bars shall be terminated in a tensile zone unless one of the following conditions is satisfied:
i) The shear is not over one‐half of that permitted, including allowance for shear
reinforcement, if any.
ii) Additional shear reinforcement in excess of that required is provided each way
from the cutoff a distance equal to the depth of the beam. The shear reinforcement

6‐386 Vol. 2

spacing shall not exceed d/8rb, where rb is the ratio of the area of bars cutoff to the
total area of bars at the section.
iii) The continuing bars provide double the area required for flexure at that point or
double the perimeter required for reinforcing bond.
(c) At least one third of the total reinforcement provided for negative moment at the support
shall be extended beyond the extreme position of the point of inflection a distance
sufficient to develop one half the allowable stress in the bar, one sixteenth of the clear
span, or the depth d of the member, whichever is greater.
(d) Tensile reinforcement of negative moment in any span of a continuous restrained or
cantilever beam, or in any member of a rigid frame, shall be adequately anchored by
reinforcing bond, hooks or mechanical anchors in or through the supporting member.
(e) At least one third of the required positive moment reinforcement in simple beams or at the
freely supported end of continuous beams shall extend along the same face of the beam
into the support at least 150 mm. At least one fourth of the required positive moment
reinforcement at the continuous end of continuous beams shall extend along the same face
of the beam into the support at least 150 mm.
(f) Compression reinforcement in flexural members shall be anchored by ties or stirrups not
less than 6 mm in diameter, spaced not farther apart than 16 bar diameters or 48 tie
diameters whichever is smaller. Such ties or stirrups shall be used throughout the distance
where compression steel is required.
(g) In regions of moment where the design tensile stresses in the steel are greater than 80 per
cent of the allowable steel tensile stress (Fs), the lap length of splices shall be increased not
less than 50 per cent of the minimum required length. Other equivalent means of stress
transfer to accomplish the same 50 per cent increase may be used.
7.6.6.5 Anchorage of Shear Reinforcement
(a) Single separate bars used as shear reinforcement shall be anchored at each end by one of the
following methods:
i) Hooking tightly around the longitudinal reinforcement through 180 degrees.
ii) Embedment above or below the mid‐depth of the beam on the compression side a
distance sufficient to develop the stress in the bar for plane or deformed bars.
iii) By a standard hook (see Sec 4.6.6.6) considered as developing 50 N/mm2, plus embedment
sufficient to develop the remainder of the stress to which the bars are subject. The
effective embedded length shall not be assumed to exceed the distance between the mid‐
depth of the beam and the tangent of the hook.
(b) The ends of bars forming single U or multiple U stirrups shall be anchored by one of the
methods specified above or shall be bent through an angle of at least 90 degrees tightly
around a longitudinal reinforcing bar not less in diameter than the stirrup bar, and shall project
beyond the bend at least 12 diameters of the stirrup.
(c) The loops or closed ends of single U or multiple U stirrups shall be anchored by bending around
the longitudinal reinforcement through an angle of at least 90 degrees and project beyond the
end of the bend at least 12 diameters of the stirrup.
7.6.6.6 Hooks
(a) The term "standard hook" shall mean one of the following:
i. A 180 degree turn plus an extension of at least 4 bar diameters but not less than 65
mm at the free end of the bar.
ii. 90 degree turn plus an extension of at least 12 bar diameters at the free end of the
bar.

Part 6
Structural Design
iii. For stirrup and tie anchorage only either a 90 degree or a 135 degree turn, plus an
extension of at least 6 bar diameters but not less than 65 mm at the free end of the
bar.
(b) The diameter of bend measured on the inside of the bar other than stirrups and ties, shall
not be less than that set forth in Table 6.4.12.
(c) Inside diameter of bend for 12 mm diameter or smaller stirrups and ties shall not be less
than 4 bar diameters. Inside diameter of bend for 16 mm diameter or larger stirrups and ties
shall not be less than that given in Table 6.4.12.
(d) Hooks shall not be permitted in the tension portion of any beam, except at the ends of
simple or cantilever beams or at the freely supported ends of continuous or restrained
beams.
Table 6.4.12: Minimum Diameter of Bend
Bar Diameter Minimum Diameter of Bend
1 6 mm φ through 25 mm φ 6 bar diameters
2 8 mm φ through 35 mm φ 8 bar diameters
(e) Hooks shall not be assumed to carry a load which would produce a tensile stress in the bar
greater than 50 N/mm2.
(f) Hooks shall not be considered effective in adding to the compressive resistance of bars.
(g) Any mechanical device capable of developing the strength of the bar without damage to the
masonry may be used in lieu of a hook. Data must be presented to show the adequacy of
such devices.
7.6.6.7 Splices
The amount of lap of lapped splices shall be sufficient to transfer the allowable stress of the
reinforcement as in Sec 4.6.6.4. In no case shall the length of the lapped splice be less than 30 bar
diameters for compression and 40 bar diameters for tension.
Welded or mechanical connections shall develop 125 per cent of the specified yield strength of the
bar in tension, except for connections of compression bars in columns that are not part of the seismic
system and are not subject to flexure, where the compressive strength only need be developed.
When adjacent splices in grouted masonry are separated by 75 mm or less, the lap length shall be
increased by 30 per cent or the splice may be staggered at least 24 bar diameters with no increase in
lap length.
7.7 Strength Design of Slender Walls and Shear Walls
7.7.1 Design of Slender Walls
In lieu of the procedure set forth in Sec 4.6, the procedures prescribed in this section, which consider the
slenderness of walls by representing effects of axial forces and deflection in calculation of moments, may be
used when the vertical load stress at the location of maximum moment computed by Eq (7.7.1) does not exceed
0.04 f ′m . The value of f m
′ shall not exceed 40 N/mm2.
Pw + Pf
≤ 0.04 f m′ 7.7.1
Ag
Slender masonry walls shall have a minimum nominal thickness of 150 mm.
7.7.1.1 Slender Wall Design Procedure
(a) Maximum Reinforcement: The reinforcement ratio shall not exceed 0.5ρb, where ρb is the
balanced steel ratio.

6‐388 Vol. 2

(b) Moment and Deflection Calculation: All moments and deflections of slender walls shall be
calculated based on simple support conditions at top and bottom. For other support and fixity
conditions, moments and deflections shall be calculated using established principles of
mechanics.
7.7.1.2 Strength Design
(a) Loads: Factored loads shall be determined in accordance with Chapter 2, Loads.

(b) Required Moment: Required moment and axial force shall be determined at the mid‐height
of the wall and shall be used for design. The factored moment, Mu, at the mid‐height of the
wall shall be determined by Eq (7.7.2).
+ Pu + (Puw + Puf )∆ u
wu h2 e
Mu = (7.7.2)
8 2
where :
∆u = horizontal deflection at mid‐height under factored load; P ‐Delta effects shall be included
in deflection calculation.
e = eccentricity of Pu
Pu = axial load at mid‐height of wall, including tributary wall weight.
= Puw + Puf
(c) Design Strength: Design strength in flexure is the nominal moment strength, Mn, multiplied
by the strength reduction factor, Ø and shall equal or exceed the factored moment, Mu.
M u ≤ φM n 7.7.3
where :
Mn = nominal moment strength
= Ase f y (d − a 2 )
Ase = effective area of steel
As f y + Pu
= , and
fy
a = depth of stress block due to factored loads.
Pu + As f y
=
0.85 f m′ b
The strength reduction factor ø for flexure shall be 0.80.
(d) Design Assumptions: The following are the design assumptions for calculation of nominal
strength.
i) Nominal strength of singly reinforced masonry wall cross‐sections subject to
combined flexure and axial load shall be based on applicable conditions of
equilibrium and compatibility of strains.
ii) Strain in reinforcement and masonry walls shall be assumed directly proportional to
the distance from the neutral axis.
iii) Maximum usable strain at extreme masonry compression fibre shall be assumed
equal to 0.003.
iv) Stress in reinforcement below specified yield strength fy shall be taken as Es times steel
strain. For strains greater than that corresponding to fy, stress in reinforcement shall
be considered independent of strain and equal to fy.
v) Tensile strength of masonry walls shall be neglected in flexural calculations of strength,
except for deflection calculation.

Part 6
Structural Design
vi) Relationship between masonry compressive stress and masonry strain may be
assumed to be rectangular as defined by the following:
1. Masonry stress of 0.85 f m′ shall be assumed uniformly distributed over an
equivalent compression zone bounded by edges of the cross‐section and a
straight line located parallel to the neutral axis at a distance a = 0.85c from the
fibre of maximum compressive strain.
2. Distance c from fibre of maximum strain to the neutral axis shall be measured
in a direction perpendicular to that axis.
7.7.1.3 Deflection Calculation
The mid‐height deflection, ∆s, under service lateral and vertical loads (without load factors) shall be
limited to:
∆s 0.007h 7.7.4
The mid‐height deflection shall be computed by:
5M s h 2
∆s = when Mser ≤ Mcr (7.7.5)
48E m I g
5M cr h 2 (M − M cr )h 2
∆s = + 5 ser when M cr < M ser < M n (7.7.6)
48E m I g 48E m I cr

The cracking moment strength of the wall Mcr shall be determined by:
Mcr = Sf r 7.7.7
The modulus of rupture, fr, shall be determined form Table 6.7.13.
Table 6.7.13 : Values of the Modulus of Rupture, ƒr
Type of Masonry Fully Grouted Partially Grouted

Solid Masonry 0.17 f m′ ≤ 0.65 N/mm2 Not allowed

Hollow Unit Masonry 0.21 f m′ ≤ 0.65 N/mm2
0.33 f m′ ≤ 1.2 N/mm2

7.7.2 Design of Shear Walls
Based on ultimate strength design, the procedures described below may be used as an alternative to the
procedure specified in Sec 4.6 for the design of reinforced hollow unit masonry shear walls. Provisions for
quality control during construction of the shear wall are specified in Sec 7.3.4
7.7.2.1 Required Strength
The required strength to resist different combinations of loads shall be determined in accordance
with Sec 2.7.5.1.
7.7.2.2 Design Strength
Shear walls shall be proportioned such that the design strength exceeds the required strength. Design
strength in terms of axial force, shear force and moment provided by the shear wall shall be
computed as the nominal strength multiplied by the strength reduction factor ø.
Strength reduction factor ø shall be as follows:
(a) ø= 0.65 for axial load and axial load with flexure
For members with fy less than 410 N/mm2 and with symmetrical reinforcement, ø may
be increased linearly to 0.85 as øPn decreases from 0.10 f ′m Ae or 0.25Pb to zero.
For solid grouted walls Pb may be calculated by

6‐390 Vol. 2

Pb = 0.85 f m′bab 7.7.8
where
ab = 0.85[emu (emu + f y ]
Es ) d
(b) ø = 0.60 for shear
The shear strength reduction factor may be 0.80 for any shear wall when its nominal
shear strength exceeds the shear corresponding to development of its nominal flexural
strength for the factored load combination.
7.7.2.3 Design Assumptions for Nominal Strength
(a) Nominal strength of shear wall cross‐sections shall be based on assumptions specified in
Sec 7.7.1.2(d).
(b) The maximum usable strain emu , at the extreme masonry compression fibre shall not exceed
0.003.
(c) ′ shall not be less than 7 N/mm2 or greater than 20 N/mm2.
fm
7.7.2.4 Axial Strength
The nominal axial strength of shear walls supporting axial loads only shall be calculated by Eq (7.7.9)
Po = 0.85 f m′ ( Ae − As ) + f y As
(7.7.9)
The shear wall shall be designed for the axial strength Pu, such that
Pu ≤ φ (0.80)Po
7.7.10
7.7.2.5 Shear Strength
(a) The nominal shear strength shall be determined by the provisions as specified in (b) or
(c) below. The maximum nominal shear strength values are given in Table 6.7.14.
Table 6.7.14: Maximum Nominal Shear Strength Values
M* Vn
Vd Ae f m′
≤ 0.25 72.0
≥1.00 48.0
* M is the maximum bending moment that occurs simultaneously with the shear load V at the
section under consideration. Interpolation may be by straight line for M/Vd values between 0.25
and 1.00.
(b) The nominal shear strength of shear walls except for shear walls specified in (c) below
shall be determined by Eq (7.7.11).
Vn = Vm + V s (7.7.11)

where :
Vm = 0.083C d Amv ( f m′ ) (7.7.12)
The value of Cd in Eq (7.7.12) is given as :
M
C d = 2.4for ≤0.25
Vd
M
= 1.2for ≥1.0
Vd
and

Part 6
Structural Design
Vs = Amv ρ n f y (7.7.13)
(c) For a shear wall whose nominal shear strength exceeds the shear corresponding to
development of its nominal flexural strength, two shear regions exist.
i) For all cross‐sections within the region defined by the base of the shear wall
and a plane at a distance Lw above the base of the shear wall, the nominal
shear strength shall be determined by Eq (7.7.14)
Vn = Amv ρ n f y (7.7.14)
The required shear strength for this region shall be calculated at a distance
Lw/2 above the base of the shear wall but not to exceed one‐half storey
height.
ii) For the other region, the nominal shear strength of the shear wall shall be
determined by Eq (7.7.11).
Reinforcement shall be in accordance with the following:
(a) Minimum reinforcement shall be provided in accordance with Sec 7.8.5.1 for all seismic areas
using this method of analysis.
(b) When the shear wall failure mode is in flexure, the nominal flexural strength of the shear wall
shall be at least 1.8 times the cracking moment strength of a fully grouted wall or 3.0 times the
cracking moment strength of a partially grouted wall as obtained from Eq (7.7.7).
(c) All continuous reinforcement shall be anchored or spliced in accordance with Sec 7.6.6.4 with
fs = 0.5fy
(d) Vertical reinforcement shall not be less than 50 per cent of the horizontal reinforcement.
(e) Spacing of horizontal reinforcement within the region defined in Sec 7.7.2.5(c) shall not exceed
three times the nominal wall thickness or 600 mm, whichever is smaller.
7.7.2.7 Boundary Member
Boundary members shall be as follows:
(a) The need for boundary members at boundaries of shear wall shall be determined using the
provisions set forth in (b) or (c) below.
(b) Boundary members shall be provided when the failure mode is flexure and the maximum
extreme fibre stress exceeds 0.2 f m′ . The boundary members may be discontinued where the
calculated compressive stresses are less than 0.15 f ′m . Stresses may be calculated for the
factored forces using a linearly elastic model and gross section properties.
(c) When the failure mode is flexure, boundary member shall be provided to confine all vertical
reinforcement whose corresponding masonry compressive stress exceeds 0.4 f m′ .
(d) The minimum length of the boundary member shall be 3 times the thickness of the wall.
(e) Boundary members shall be confined with minimum of 10 mm diameter bars at a maximum of
200 mm spacing or equivalent within the grouted core and within the region defined by the base
of the shear wall and a plane at a distance Lw above the base of the shear wall.
7.8 Earthquake Resistant Design
7.8.1 General
All masonry structures constructed in the Seismic Zones 2, 3 and 4 shown in Fig 2.5.1 shall be designed in
accordance with the provisions of this Section.

6‐392 Vol. 2

7.8.2 Loads
Seismic forces on masonry structures shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of Sec 2.5 of this
Part.
7.8.3 Materials
(a) Well burnt clay bricks and concrete hollow blocks having a crushing strength not less than
12 N/mm2 shall be used.
(b) Mortar not leaner than M3 shall be used for masonry constructions.
7.8.4 Provisions for Seismic Zone 2 and 3
7.8.4.1 Wall Reinforcement
Vertical reinforcement of at least 12 mm φ shall be provided continuously from support to support at
each corner, at each side of each opening, at the ends of walls and at a maximum spacing of 1.2 m
horizontally throughout the wall. Horizontal reinforcement not less than 12 mm φ shall be provided:
(a) at the bottom and top of wall openings and shall extend at least 40 bar diameters, with a
minimum of 600 mm, past the opening,
(b) continuously at structurally connected roof and floor levels and at the top of walls,
(c) at the bottom of the wall or in the top of the foundations when dowelled to the wall,
(d) at maximum spacing of 3.0 m unless uniformly distributed joint reinforcement is provided.
Reinforcement at the top and bottom of openings when continuous in the wall may be used in
determining the maximum spacing specified in item (a) above.
7.8.4.2 Stack Bond
Where stack bond is used, the minimum horizontal reinforcement ratio shall be 0.0007bt. This ratio
shall be satisfied by uniformly distributed joint reinforcement or by horizontal reinforcement spaced
not more than 1.2 m and fully embedded in grout or mortar.
7.8.4.3 Columns
Columns shall be reinforced as specified in Sec 7.6.6.1.
7.8.5 Provisions for Seismic Zone 4
All masonry structures built in Seismic Zone 4 shall be designed and constructed in accordance with
requirements for Seismic Zone 2 and with the following additional requirements and limitations.
Reinforced hollow unit stack bond construction which is part of the seismic resisting system shall use open‐end
units so that all head joints are made solid, shall use bond beam units to facilitate the flow of grout and shall be
grouted solid.
7.8.5.1 Wall Reinforcement
Reinforced masonry walls shall be reinforced with both vertical and horizontal reinforcement. The
sum of the areas of horizontal and vertical reinforcement shall be at least 0.002 times the gross cross‐
sectional area of the wall and the area of reinforcement in either direction shall not be less than
0.0007 times the gross cross‐sectional area of the wall. The spacing of reinforcement shall not exceed
1.20 m. The diameter of reinforcing bar shall not be less than 10 mm except that joint reinforcement
may be considered as part of all of the requirements for minimum reinforcement. Reinforcement
shall be continuous around wall corners and through intersections. Only reinforcement which is
continuous in the wall or element shall be considered in computing the minimum area of
reinforcement. Reinforcement with splices conforming to Sec 7.6.6.7 shall be considered as
continuous reinforcement.
7.8.5.2 Column Reinforcement
The spacing of column ties shall be not more than 225 mm for the full height of columns stressed by
tensile or compressive axial overturning forces due to the seismic loads, and 225 mm for the tops and

Part 6
Structural Design
bottoms of all other columns for a distance of one sixth of the clear column height, but not less than
450 mm or maximum column dimension. Tie spacing for the remaining column height shall be not
more than 16 bar diameters, 48 tie diameters or the least column dimension, but not more than 450
mm.
7.8.5.3 Stack Bond
Where stack bond is used, the minimum horizontal reinforcement ratio shall be 0.0015bt. If open‐end
units are used and grouted solid, the minimum horizontal reinforcement ratio shall be 0.0007bt.
7.8.5.4 Minimum Dimension
(a) Bearing Walls: The nominal thickness of reinforced masonry bearing walls shall be not less than
150 mm except that nominal 100 mm thick load bearing reinforced hollow clay unit masonry
walls may be used, provided net area unit strength exceeds 55 N/mm2, units are laid in running
bond, bar sizes do not exceed 12 mm with no more than two bars or one splice in a cell, and
joints are flush cut, concave or a protruding V section.
(b) Columns: The least nominal dimension of a reinforced masonry column shall be 375 mm
except that if the allowable stresses are reduced to 50 per cent of the values given in Sec 4.3,
the minimum nominal dimension shall be 250 mm.
7.8.5.5 Shear Wall
(a) When calculating shear or diagonal tension stresses, shear walls which resist seismic forces
shall be designed to resist 1.5 times the forces specified in Chapter 2, Loads.
(b) The portion of the reinforcement required to resist shear shall be uniformly distributed and
shall be joint reinforcing, deformed bars, or a combination thereof. The maximum spacing of
reinforcement in each direction shall be not less than the smaller of one‐half the length or
height of the element or more than 1.20 m.
Joint reinforcement used in exterior walls and considered in the determination of the shear
strength of the member shall conform to the requirement "Joint Reinforcement for Masonry"
(UBC Standard No. 24‐15) or "Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete
Reinforcement", (ASTM, A82).
Reinforcement required to resist in‐plane shear shall be terminated with a standard hook or
with an extension of proper embedment length beyond the reinforcing at the end of the wall
section. The hook or extension may be turned up, down or horizontally. Provisions shall be
made not to obstruct grout placement. Wall reinforcement terminating in columns or beams
shall be fully anchored into these elements.
(c) Multi‐wythe grouted masonry shear walls shall be designed with consideration of the adhesion
bond strength between the grout and masonry units. When bond strengths are not known
from previous tests, the bond strength shall be determined by test.
7.8.5.6 Hook
The standard hook for tie anchorage shall have a minimum turn of 135 degrees plus an extension of
at least 6 bar diameters, but not less than 100 mm at the free end of the bar. Where the ties are
placed in the horizontal bed joints, the hook shall consist of a 90 degree bend having a radius of not
less than 4 tie diameters plus an extension of 32 tie diameters.
7.8.5.7 Mortar Joints Between Masonry and Concrete
Concrete abutting structural masonry such as at starter courses or at wall intersections not designed
as true separation joints shall be roughened to a full amplitude of` 1.5 mm and shall be bonded to the
masonry as per the requirements of this section as if it were masonry.
7.8.6 Additional Requirements
7.8.6.1 Opening in Bearing Walls

6‐394 Vol. 2

(a) Tops of all openings in a storey shall preferably be at the same level so that a continuous
band could be provided over them, including the lintels throughout the building.
(b) The total width of the openings shall not be more than half of the length of the walls
between the adjacent cross walls, except as provided in (f) below.
(c) The opening shall preferably be located away from the corner by a clear distance equal to at
least one‐eighth of the height of the opening for Seismic Zone 2 and 3 and one‐fourth of the
height for Seismic Zone 4.
(d) The horizontal distance between two openings shall not be less than one‐fourth of the height
of the shorter opening for Seismic Zone 2 and 3 and one‐half of the height for Seismic Zone 4.
(e) The vertical distance between openings one above the other shall be not less than 600 mm.
(f) Where openings do not comply with the requirements of (b) and (c) above, they shall be
strengthened in accordance with Sec 7.8.6.5.
(g) If a window or ventilator is to be projected out, the projection shall be in reinforced masonry
or concrete and well anchored.
(h) If an opening is tall say, for the full height of wall, dividing the wall into two portions, these
portions shall be reinforced with horizontal reinforcement of 6 mm diameter bars at not
more than 600 mm intervals, one on inner and one on outer face, properly tied to vertical
steel at jambs and corners or junctions of walls where used.
(i) The use of arches to span over the openings is a source of weakness and shall be avoided
unless steel ties are provided.
7.8.6.2 Strengthening Arrangements
All masonry buildings shall be strengthened by the methods specified in Table 6.7.15.
Table 6.7.15 : Strengthening of Masonry Buildings for Earthquake
Seismic Zones No. of Strengthening Arrangements to be

Storey Provided.
1 Up to 4 a) Masonry mortar shall not be leaner than M3

2 Up to 2 with a) Masonry mortar shall not be leaner than
pitched roof M3
b) By lintel and roof band (Sec 7.8.6.3)
c) By vertical reinforcement at corners and
junctions of walls (Sec 7.8.6.4)
d) Bracing in plan at tie level for pitched roof*

3 to 4 a) Masonry mortar shall not be leaner than
M3
d) Vertical reinforcement at jambs of openings
(Sec 7.8.6.5)
e) Bracing in plan at tie level for pitched roof*

Part 6
Structural Design
3 Up to 4 a) Masonry mortar shall not be leaner than

M3
d) Vertical reinforcement at jambs of openings
(Sec 7.8.6.5)
e) Bracing in plan at tie level for pitched roof*
• At tie level all the trusses and the gable end shall be provided with diagonal
bracing in plan so as to transmit the lateral shear due to earthquake force to
the gable walls acting as shear walls at the ends.
7.8.6.3 Bands
Roof band need not be provided underneath reinforced concrete or brickwork slabs resting on
bearing walls, provided the slabs are continuous over parts between crumple sections, if any, and
cover the width of end walls fully.
The band shall be made of reinforced concrete with f c′ not less than 20 N/mm2 or reinforced
brickwork in cement mortar not leaner than 1: 4. The bands shall be to the full width of the wall and
not less than 75 mm in depth and shall be reinforced as indicated in Table 6.7.16. In case of
reinforced brickwork, the thickness of joints containing steel bars shall be increased so as to have a
minimum mortar cover of 6 mm around the bar. In bands of reinforced brickwork, the area of steel
provided shall be equal to that specified above for reinforced concrete bands.
Table 6.7.16 : Band Reinforcement
Reinforcement
Seismic Plain Mild Steel High Strength Links
Zones Bars Deformed Bars
2 2 ‐ 12 mm φ, one on 2 ‐ 10 mm φ, one on each 6 mm dia,
each face of the wall face of the wall with 150 mm c/c
with suitable cover suitable cover

3 2 ‐ 16 mm φ, one on 2 ‐ 12 mm φ, one on each 6 mm dia,
each face of the wall face of the wall with 150 mm c/c
with suitable cover suitable cover
7.8.6.4 Strengthening of Corner and Junctions
Vertical steel at corners and junctions of walls which are up to one and a half bricks thick shall be
provided either with mild steel or high strength deformed bars as specified in Table 6.7.17. For
thicker walls, reinforcement shall be increased proportionately. The reinforcement shall be properly
embedded in the plinth masonry of foundations and roof slab or roof band so as to develop its tensile
strength in bond and passing through the lintel bands in all storeys. Bars in different storeys may be
welded or suitably lapped.
(a) Typical details of vertical steel in brickwork and hollow block at corners, T‐junctions and jambs
of opening are shown in Fig 6.7.1 and Fig 6.7.2.
(b) Details of vertical reinforcement given in Table 6.7.17 are applicable to brick masonry and
hollow block masonry.

6‐396 Vol. 2

Fig. 6.7.1: Typical details of vertical reinforcement in brick masonry

Part 6
Structural Design

Fig. 6.7.2: Typical details of vertical reinforcement in hollow block masonry
Table 6.7.17: Vertical Reinforcement for Brick and Hollow Block Masonry
Diameter of Single Bar Diameter of Single Bar
No. of Storeys or Equivalent Area of Plain or Equivalent Area of High
Storeys Mild Steel Bar to be Strength Deformed Bar to
Provided be Provided
Zone 2 & 3 Zone 4 Zone 2 & 3 Zone 4
(mm) (mm) (mm) (mm)
1 ‐ nil 12 nil 10

2 Top nil 12 nil 10
Bottom nil 16 nil 12

3 Top 12 12 10 10
Middle 12 16 10 12
Bottom 16 16 12 12

4 Top 12 12 10 10
Third 12 16 10 12
Second 16 20 12 16
Bottom 16 25 12 20

7.8.6.5 Strengthening of Jambs of Openings
Openings in bearing walls shall be strengthened, where necessary, by providing reinforced concrete
members or reinforcing the brickwork around them as shown in Fig 6.7.3.
7.8.6.6 Walls Adjoining Structural Framing
Where walls are dependent on the structural frame for lateral support they shall be anchored to the
structural members with metal ties or keyed to the structural members. Horizontal ties shall consist
of 6 mm diameter U‐bars spaced at a maximum of 450 mm on centre and embedded at least 250 mm
into the masonry and properly tied to the vertical steel of the same member.

6‐398 Vol. 2

2&3
4)

Fig. 6.7.3: Minimum reinforcement in walls and around openings in Seismic Zones 2, 3 and 4
7.9 PROVISIONS FOR HIGH WIND REGIONS
7.9.1 General
The provisions of this section shall apply to masonry structures located at regions where the basic wind speed is
greater than 200 km/h.
7.9.2 Materials
Materials for masonry structures shall generally comply with the provisions of Part 5; however, there are some
special requirements for masonry construction in high wind regions, which are given below:
(a) Burnt clay bricks shall have a compressive strength not less than 15 N/mm2,
(b) Grout shall have a minimum compressive strength of 12.5 N/mm2,
(c) Mortar for exterior walls and interior shear walls shall be type M1 or M2,
(d) Un burnt clay masonry units shall not be used.
7.9.3 Construction Requirements
Masonry construction shall comply with the provisions of Sec 7.10.

Part 6
Structural Design

7.9.4 Foundation
Footings shall have a thickness of not less than 375 mm and shall be extended 450 mm below the undisturbed
ground surface. Foundation stem wall shall have the same width and reinforcement as the wall it supports.
7.9.5 Drainage
Walls retaining more than 1 m of earth and enclosing interior spaces or floors below grade shall have minimum
100 mm diameter footing drain. A slope of 1:50 away from the building shall be provided around the building.
7.9.6 Wall Construction
7.9.6.1 Minimum thickness of different types of wall shall be as given in Table 6.7.18.
Table 6.7.18: Minimum thickness of Walls in High Wind Region
Type of Wall Minimum Thickness
(mm)
Unreinforced grouted brick wall 250
Reinforced exterior bearing wall 200
Unreinforced hollow and solid masonry wall 200
Interior nonbearing wall 150
7.9.6.2 All walls shall be laterally supported at the top and bottom. The maximum unsupported height of
bearing walls or other masonry walls shall be 3.5 m. Gable end walls may be 4.5 m high at their peak.
7.9.6.3 The span of lintels over openings shall not exceed 3.5 m. All lintels shall be reinforced and the
reinforcement bars shall extend not less than 600 mm beyond the edge of opening and into lintel
supports.
7.9.6.4 Walls shall be adequately reinforced.
7.9.6.5 Anchors between walls and floors or roofs shall be embedded in grouted cells or cavities and shall
conform to Sec 7.9.7 below.
7.9.7 Floor and Roof Systems
Floors and roofs of all masonry structures shall be adequately anchored with the wall it supports to resist lateral
and uplift forces due to wind specified in Sec 2.4 of this Part.
7.9.8 Lateral Force Resistance
7.9.8.1 Strapping, approved framing anchors and mechanical fasteners, bond beams and vertical
reinforcement shall be installed to provide a continuous tie from the roof to foundation system as
shown in Fig 6.7.4. In addition, roof and floor systems, masonry shear walls, or masonry or wood cross
walls shall be provided for lateral stability.
7.9.8.2 Floor and roof diaphragms shall be properly connected to masonry walls. Gable and sloped roof
members not supported at the ridge shall be tied by the ceiling joist or equivalent lateral ties located
as close to where the roof members bear on the wall as practically possible and not at more than 1.2
m on centers. Collar ties shall not be used for these lateral ties.
7.9.8.3 Masonry walls shall be provided around all sides of floor and roof systems in accordance with
Fig 6.7.5. The cumulative length of exterior masonry walls along each side of the floor or roof systems

6‐400 Vol. 2

shall be at least 20 per cent of the parallel dimension. Required elements shall be without openings
and shall not be less that 1.25 m in width.
Interior cross walls at right angles to bearing walls shall be provided when the length of the building
perpendicular to the span of the floor of roof framing exceeds twice the distance between shear walls
or 10 m, whichever is greater.
7.9.8.4 When required interior cross wall shall be at least 1.8 m long and reinforced with 2 mm wire joint

reinforcement spaced not more than 400 mm on centre.

Fig. 6.7.4: Continuous tie from roof to foundation of masonry structure

Fig. 6.7.5: Masonry walls required in high wind regions

Part 6
Structural Design
7.10 CONSTRUCTION
7.10.1 General
Masonry shall be constructed according to the provisions of this section.
7.10.2 Storage and Preparation of Construction Materials
Storage, handling and preparation at the site shall conform to the following:
(a) Masonry materials shall be stored in such a way that at the time of use the materials are clean
and structurally suitable for the intended use.
(b) b) All metal reinforcement shall be free from loose rust and other coatings that would inhibit
reinforcing bond.
(c) Burnt clay units shall have a rate of absorption per minute not exceeding one litre per square
metre at the time of lying. In the absorption test the surface of the unit shall be held 3 mm
below the surface of the water.
(d) Burnt clay units shall be thoroughly wetted before placing. Concrete masonry units shall not be
wetted unless otherwise approved.
(e) Materials shall be stored in such a manner that deterioration or intrusion of foreign materials is
prevented and at the time of mixing the material conforms to the applicable requirements.
(f) The method of measuring materials for mortar and grout shall be such that proportions of the
materials can be easily controlled.
(g) Mortar or grout mixed at the job site shall be mixed for a period of time not less than 3 minutes
or more than 10 minutes in a mechanical mixer with the amount of water required to provide
the desired workability. Hand mixing of small amounts of mortar is permitted. Mortar may be
retempered. Mortar or grout which has hardened or stiffened due to hydration of the cement
shall not be used, but under no case shall mortar be used two and one‐half hours, nor grout
used one and one‐half hours, after the initial mixing water has been added to the dry
ingredients at the job site.
7.10.3 Placing Masonry Units
(a) The mortar shall be sufficiently plastic and units shall be placed with sufficient pressure to
extrude mortar from the joint and produce a tight joint. Deep furrowing which produces
voids shall not be used.
The initial bed joint thickness shall not be less than 5 mm or more than 25 mm; subsequent
bed joints shall be not less than 5 mm or more than 15 mm in thickness.
(b) All surfaces in contact with mortar or grout shall be clean and free of deleterious materials.
(c) Solid masonry units shall have full head and bed joints.
(d) All head and bed joints shall be filled solidly with mortar for a distance from the face of the
unit not less than the thickness of the shell.
Head joints of open‐end units with beveled ends need not be mortared. The beveled ends
shall form a grout key which permits grout within 16 mm of the face of the unit. The units
shall be tightly butted to prevent leakage of grout.
7.10.4 Verticality and Alignment
All masonry shall be built true and plumb within the tolerances prescribed below. Care shall be taken to keep
the perpends properly aligned.
(a) Deviation from vertical within a storey shall not exceed 6 mm per 3m height.
(b) Deviation in verticality in total height of any wall of a building more than one storey in
height shall not exceed 12 mm.
(c) Deviation from position shown on plan of any brickwork shall not exceed 12 mm.
(d) Relative displacement between load bearing walls in adjacent storeys intended to be in
vertical alignment shall not exceed 6 mm.

6‐402 Vol. 2

(e) Deviation of bed joint from horizontal in a length of 12 m shall not exceed 6 mm subject to a
maximum deviation of 12 mm.
(f) Deviation from the specified thickness of bed joints, cross joints and perpends shall not
exceed one‐fifth of the specified thickness.
7.10.5 Reinforcement Placing
Reinforcing details shall conform to the requirements of Sec 4.6.6. Metal reinforcement shall be located in
accordance with the plans and specifications. Reinforcement shall be secured against displacement prior to
grouting by wire positioners or other suitable devices at intervals not exceeding 20 bar diameters.
Tolerances for the placement of steel in walls and flexural elements shall be ±12 mm for d ≤ 200 mm, ± 25 mm
for 200 mm ≤ d ≤ 600 mm and ± 30 mm for d > 600 mm. Tolerance for longitudinal location of reinforcement
shall be ± 50 mm.
7.10.6 Grouted Masonry
Grouted masonry shall be constructed in such a manner that all elements act together as a structural element.
Space to be filled with grout shall be clean and shall not contain any foreign materials. Grout materials and
water content shall be controlled to provide adequate workability and shall be mixed thoroughly. The grouting
of any section of wall shall be completed in one day with no interruptions greater than one hour.
Size and height limitations of the grout space or cell shall not be less than those shown in Table 6.7.19. Higher
grout pours or smaller cavity widths or cell size than shown in Table 6.7.19 may be used when approved, if it can
be demonstrated that grout spaces are properly filled.
Cleanouts are required for all grout pours over 1.5 m in height. When required, cleanouts shall be provided in
the bottom course at every vertical bar but shall not be spaced more than 800 mm on centre for solidly grouted
masonry. When cleanouts are required, they shall be sealed after inspection and before grouting. When
cleanouts are not provided, special provisions must be made to keep the bottom and sides of the grout spaces,
as well as the minimum total clear area as required by Table 6.7.19, clean and clear prior to grouting.
Table 6.7.19: Grouting Limitations
Grout pour Minimum Dimensions of the Total Clear
Grout Type Maximum Areas within Grout Spaces and Cells
Height (m)
Multi‐wythe Hollow Unit
Masonry (m m ) Masonry
(mm )
Fine 0.30 20 40 × 50
Fine 1.50 40 40 × 50
Fine 2.40 40 40 × 75
Fine 3.65 40 45 × 75
Fine 7.30 50 75 × 75

Coarse 0.30 40 40 × 75
Coarse 1.50 50 60 × 75
Coarse 2.40 50 75 × 75
Coarse 3.65 60 75 × 75
Coarse 7.30 75 75 × 100
7.10.7 Chases, Recesses and Holes
(a) Chases, recesses and holes may be permitted in masonry provided either they are considered
in the structural design or they are not cut into walls made of hollow or perforated units, or
vertical chases are planned instead of horizontal chases.

Part 6
Structural Design
(b) Depth of vertical and horizontal chases in load bearing walls shall not exceed one‐third and
one‐sixth of the wall thickness respectively.
(c) Vertical chases shall not be closer than 2 m in any stretch of wall and shall not be located
within 350 mm of an opening or within 230 mm of a cross wall that serves as stiffening wall for
stability. Width of a vertical chase shall not exceed the thickness of wall in which it occurs.
(d) Horizontal chases shall be located in the upper or lower middle third height of wall at a
distance not less than 600 mm from lateral support. No horizontal chase shall exceed one
metre in length and there shall not be more than 2 chases in any one wall. Horizontal chases
shall have minimum mutual separation distance of 500 mm. Sum of lengths of all chases and
recesses in any horizontal plane shall not exceed one‐fourth the length of the wall.
(e) Lintel shall not be used to support masonry directly above a recess or a hole wider than 300
mm. No lintel however, is necessary in case of a circular recess or hole exceeding 300 mm in
diameter provided upper half of the recess or hole is built as a semi‐circular arch of adequate
thickness and there is adequate length of masonry on the sides of openings to resist the
horizontal thrust.
(f) Recesses and holes in masonry shall be kept at the time of construction so as to avoid
subsequent cutting. If cutting is necessary, it shall be done using sharp tools without causing
heavy impact and damage to the surrounding areas.
(g) No chase, recess or hole shall be provided in half‐brick load bearing wall, excepting the
minimum number of holes needed for scaffolding.
7.11 CONFINED MASONRY
7.11.1 General
Confined masonry construction consists of masonry walls (made either of clay brick or concrete block units) and
horizontal and vertical RC confining members built on all four sides of a masonry wall panel. Vertical members,
called tie‐columns or practical columns, resemble columns in RC frame construction except that they tend to be
of far smaller cross‐section. Horizontal elements, called tie‐beams, resemble beams in RC frame construction.
To emphasize that confining elements are not beams and columns, alternative terms horizontal ties and vertical
ties could be used instead of tie‐beams and tie‐columns.
The confining members are effective in
(a) Enhancing the stability and integrity of masonry walls for in‐plane and out‐of‐plane earthquake loads
(confining members can effectively contain damaged masonry walls),
(b) Enhancing the strength (resistance) of masonry walls under lateral earthquake loads, and
(c) Reducing the brittleness of masonry walls under earthquake loads and hence improving their
earthquake performance.
The structural components of a confined masonry building are (see Figure 6.7.6):
(a) Masonry walls – transmit the gravity load from the slab(s) above down to the foundation. The walls act
as bracing panels, which resist horizontal earthquake forces. The walls must be confined by concrete
tie‐beams and tie‐columns to ensure satisfactory earthquake performance.
(b) Confining elements (tie‐columns and tie‐beams) – provide restraint to masonry walls and protect them
from complete disintegration even in major earthquakes.
These elements resist gravity loads and have important role in ensuring vertical stability of a building in an
earthquake.
(a) Floor and roof slabs – transmit both gravity and lateral loads to the walls. In an earthquake, slabs
behave like horizontal beams and are called diaphragms.
(b) Plinth band – transmits the load from the walls down to the foundation. It also protects the ground
floor walls from excessive settlement in soft soil conditions.
(c) Foundation – transmits the loads from the structure to the ground.

6‐404 Vol. 2

The design of confined masonry members shall be based on similar assumptions to those set out for
unreinforced and for reinforced masonry members. Confined masonry shall be constructed according to the
provisions of this section.

Fig. 6.7.6: A typical confined masonry building
7.11.2 Difference of Confined Masonry from RC Frame Construction
The appearance of a finished confined masonry construction and a RC frame construction with masonry in fills
may look alike, however these two construction systems are substantially different. The main differences are
related to the construction sequence, as well as to the manner in which these structures resist gravity and
lateral loads. These differences are summarized in Table 6.7.20 and are illustrated by diagrams in Figure 6.7.7.
In confined masonry construction, confining elements are not designed to act as a moment‐resisting frame; as a
result, detailing of reinforcement is simple. In general, confining elements have smaller cross‐sectional
dimensions than the corresponding beams and columns in a RC frame building. It should be noted that the most
important difference between the confined masonry walls and infill walls is that infill walls are not load‐bearing
walls, while the walls in a confined masonry building are.
A transition from RC frame to confined masonry construction in most cases leads to savings related to concrete
cost, since confining elements are smaller in size than the corresponding RC frame members.
Table 6.7.20. A comparison between the confined masonry and RC frame construction
Confined masonry RC frame construction

Gravity and Masonry walls are the main RC frames resist both
lateral load‐ load bearing elements and are gravity and lateral loads
resisting expected to resist both gravity through their relatively
system and lateral loads. Confining large beams, columns, and
elements (tie‐beams and tie‐ their connections.
columns) are significantly Masonry in fills are not load‐
smaller in size than RC beams bearing walls
Foundation Strip footing beneath the wall Isolated footing beneath
construction and the RC plinth band each column

Partt 6
Stru
uctural Design
Confin
ned masonry RC fram
me construction
Superstructurre 1. Masonry walls are 1. The fram
me is
construction constructed
d first. constructeed first.
sequence 2. Subsequeently, tie‐column
ns 2. Masonrry walls are
are cast in p
place. constructeed at a later
3. Finally, tiee‐beams are stage and are not
constructed
d on top of the bonded to
o the frame
walls, simulttaneously with tthe members; these walls are
n.
floor/roof sllab construction nonstructu
ural, that is, non
n‐

Fig. 6.7.7: RC
C frame construction (top) and confined mason
nry construction
n (bottom)
7.1
11.3 Mecha
anism of Re
esisting Earrthquake Effects
A confined
c masoonry building subjected to earthquake gground shakin ng can be mo
odeled as a veertical truss, as
shoown in Figure 6.7.8 (left). Masonry
M wallss act as diago
onal struts subjected to co
ompression, while
w reinforceed
conncrete confiniing memberss act in tenssion and/or ccompression, depending o on the direcction of laterral
earthquake forcees. This mode el is appropriaate before the cracking in the walls takkes place. Subbsequently, th he
craccking is conceentrated at the ground floo or level and siggnificant laterral deformatio ons take placee. Under severe
earthquake ground shaking, th he collapse of f confined massonry buildinggs may take place due to so oft storey effeect
sim
milar to the onee observed in RC frames witth masonry in n fills, as shown in Figure 6.77.8 (right).
e following failure modes arre characteristtic of confined
The d masonry walls:
(a) Sheaar failure mod
de, and
(b) Flexural failure mode.

Note that, in confined masonry structures, shear failure mode develops due to in‐plane seismic loads (acting
along in the plane of the wall), whereas flexural failure mode may develop either due to in‐plane or out‐of‐plane
loads (acting perpendicular to the wall plane).

Fig. 6.7.8: Confined masonry building: vertical truss model
(left) and collapse at the ground floor level (right)
Shear failure mode is characterized by distributed diagonal cracking in the wall. These cracks propagate into the
tie‐columns at higher load levels, as shown in Figure 6.7.9. Initially, a masonry wall panel resists the effects of
lateral earthquake loads by itself while the confining elements (tie‐columns) do not play a significant role.
However, once the cracking takes place, the wall pushes the tie‐columns sideways. At that stage, vertical
reinforcement in tie‐columns becomes engaged in resisting tension and compression stresses. Damage in the
tie‐columns at the ultimate load level is concentrated at the top and the bottom of the panel. These locations,
characterized by extensive crushing of concrete and yielding of steel reinforcement, are called plastic hinges
(Figure 6.7.10). Note that the term plastic hinge has a different meaning in the context of confined masonry
components than that referred to in relation to RC beams and columns, where these hinges form due to flexure
and axial loads. In confined masonry construction, tie‐beams and tie‐columns resist axial loads. Shear failure can
lead to severe damage in the masonry wall and the top and bottom of the tie‐columns.

Fig. 6.7.9: Shear failure of confined masonry walls

Fig. 6.7.10: Plastic hinge developed in a confined masonry wall
Flexural failure caused by in‐plane lateral loads is characterized by horizontal cracking in the mortar bed joints
on the tension side of the wall, as shown in Figure 6.7.11. Extensive horizontal cracking, which usually takes
place in tie‐columns, as well as shear cracking can be observed.

Part 6
Structural Design

Fig. 6.7.11: Flexural failure of confined masonry walls
Irrespective of the failure mechanism, tie‐columns resist the major portion of gravity load when masonry walls
suffer severe damage (this is due to their high axial stiffness and load resistance). The failure of a tie‐ column
usually takes place when cracks propagate from the masonry wall into the tie‐column and shear it off.
Subsequently, the vertical stability of the entire wall is compromised. Vertical strains in the confined masonry
walls decrease at an increased damage level, thereby indicating that a major portion of the gravity load is
resisted by tie‐columns. This finding confirms the notion that tie‐ columns have a critical role in resisting the
gravity load in damaged confined masonry buildings and ensuring their vertical stability.
7.11.4 Key Factors Influencing Seismic Resistance
7.11.4.1 Wall Density
Wall density is believed to be one of the key parameters influencing the seismic performance of
confined masonry buildings. It can be determined as the transverse area of walls in each principal
direction divided by the total floor area of the building.
7.11.4.2 Masonry Units and Mortar
The lateral load resistance of confined masonry walls strongly depends on the strength of the
masonry units and the mortar used. The walls built using low‐strength bricks or un grouted hollow
block units had the lowest strength while the ones built using grouted or solid units had the largest
strength. However, the use of grouted and solid units results in an increase both in wall mass and
seismic loads. Also, the weaker the mortar the lower the masonry strength (due to the unit‐mortar
interaction, the masonry strength is always lower than the unit strength). There is no significant
difference in strength between unreinforced and confined masonry wall specimens with the same
geometry and material properties.
7.11.4.3 Tie‐Columns
Tie‐columns significantly influence the ductility and stability of cracked confined masonry walls. The
provision of closely spaced transverse reinforcement (ties) at the top and bottom ends of tie‐columns
results in improved wall stability and ductility in the post‐cracking stage.
7.11.4.4 Horizontal Wall Reinforcement
Horizontal reinforcement has a beneficial effect on wall ductility. Specimens with horizontal
reinforcement showed a more uniform distribution of inclined shear cracks than the unreinforced
specimens. Horizontal re bars should be anchored into the tie‐columns; the anchorage should be
provided with 900 hooks at the far end of the tie‐column (see Figure 6.7.12). The hooks should be
embedded in the concrete within the tie‐column (note that the tie‐column reinforcement was
omitted from the figure). The bar diameter should be larger than 3.5 mm and less than ¾ the joint
thickness.

6‐408 Vol. 2

Fig. 6.7.12: Horizontal reinforcement in confined masonry walls
7.11.4.5 Openings
When the opening area is less than approximately 10% of the total wall area, the wall lateral load
resistance is not significantly reduced as compared to a solid wall (i.e. wall without openings). The
walls with larger openings develop diagonal cracks (same as solid walls), except that the cracks are
formed in the piers between the openings; thus, diagonal struts form in the piers, as shown in Figure
6.7.13.

Fig. 6.7.13: Failure modes in the confined masonry walls with openings
7.11.5 Verification of Members
7.11.5.1 In the verification of confined masonry members subjected to bending and/or axial loading, the
assumptions for reinforced masonry members should be adopted. In determining the design value of
the moment of resistance of a section a rectangular stress distribution may be assumed, based on the
strength of the masonry, only. Reinforcement in compression should also be ignored.
7.11.5.2 In the verification of confined masonry members subjected to shear loading the shear resistance of

the member should be taken as the sum of the shear resistance of the masonry and of the concrete of
the confining elements. In calculating the shear resistance of the masonry the rules for unreinforced
masonry walls subjected to shear loading should be used, considering the length of the masonry
element. Reinforcement of confining elements should not be taken into account.
7.11.5.3 In the verification of confined masonry members subjected to lateral loading, the assumptions set out
for unreinforced and reinforced masonry walls should be used. The contribution of the reinforcement
of the confining elements should be considered.
7.11.6 Confined Masonry Members
7.11.6.1 Confined masonry members shall not exhibit flexural cracking nor deflect excessively under
serviceability loading conditions.

Part 6
Structural Design
7.11.6.2 The verification of confined masonry members at the serviceability limit states shall be based on the
assumptions given for unreinforced masonry members.
7.11.7 Architectural Guideline
7.11.7.1 Building Layout
(a) The building should not be excessively long relative to its width; ideally, the length‐to‐width

ratio should not exceed 4.
(b) The walls should be continuous up the building height.
(c) Openings (doors and windows) should be placed in the same position up the building height.
7.11.7.2 Walls
(a) At least two fully confined walls should be provided in each direction.
(b) For Seismic Zone 1 and 2, wall density of at least 2% in each of two orthogonal directions is
required to ensure good earthquake performance of confined masonry construction. The wall
density for Seismic Zones 3 and 4 should be at least 4% and 5% respectively. Wall density can
be defined as the total cross sectional area of all walls in one direction divided by the sum of
the floor plan areas for all floors in a building.
7.11.7.3 Building Height
Confined masonry is suitable for low‐ to medium‐rise building construction. Confined masonry buildings will be
subject to the following height restrictions:
(a) Up to 4‐storey high for Seismic Zone 1 and 2
(b) Up to 3‐storey high for Seismic Zone 3
(c) Up to 2‐storey high for Seismic Zone 4
7.11.8 Confined Masonry Details
7.11.8.1 Confined masonry walls shall be provided with vertical and horizontal reinforced concrete or
reinforced masonry confining elements so that they act together as a single structural member.
7.11.8.2 Top and sides confining elements shall be cast after the masonry has been built so that they will be
duly anchored together.
7.11.8.3 Vertical confining elements should be placed:
(a) at the free edges of each structural wall element;
(b) at both sides of any wall opening with an area of more than 1.5 m2;
(c) within the wall if necessary in order not to exceed a spacing of 5 m between the confining
elements;
(d) at the intersections of structural walls, wherever the confining elements imposed by the above
rules are at a distance larger than 1.5 m.
7.11.8.4 Horizontal confining elements shall be placed in the plane of the wall at every floor level and in any
case with a vertical spacing of not more than 4 m.

6‐410 Vol. 2

7.11.8.5 Confining elements should have a cross‐sectional area not less than 0.02 m2, with a minimum
dimension of 150 mm in the plan of the wall. In double‐leaf walls the thickness of confining elements
should assure the connection of the two leaves and their effective confinement.
7.11.8.6 The longitudinal reinforcement of confining elements may not have a cross‐sectional area less than
300 mm2, nor than 1% of the cross‐sectional area of the confining element. The detailing of the
reinforcements should be in accordance with Chapter 8.
7.11.8.7 Stirrups not less than 6 mm in diameter and spaced not more than 300 mm should be provided
around the longitudinal reinforcement. Column ties should preferably have 135° hooks – the use of
90° hooks is not recommended. At a minimum, 6 mm ties at 200 mm spacing (6 mm@200 mm) should
be provided. It is recommended to use 6 mm ties at 100 mm spacing (6 mm@100 mm) in the column
end‐zones (top and bottom).
7.11.8.8 To ensure the effectiveness of tie‐beams in resisting earthquake loads, longitudinal bars should have a
90° hooked anchorage at the intersections, as shown in Figure 6.7.14. The hook length should be at
least 500 mm.
a)
b)
Fig. 6.4.14: Tie‐beam construction: a) wall intersections;
b)hooked anchorage to longitudinal reinforcement
7.11.8.9 Proper detailing of the tie‐beam‐to‐tie‐column connections is a must for satisfactory earthquake
performance of the entire building. Reinforcing bars must be properly anchored. A typical connection
detail at the roof level is shown in Figure 6.7.15. Note that the tie‐column reinforcement needs to be
extended into the tie‐beam as much as possible, preferably up to the underside of the top tie‐beam
reinforcement. A hooked anchorage needs to be provided (90° hooks) both for the tie‐column and tie‐
beam reinforcement.

Part 6
Structural Design

Fig. 6.7.15: Detailing requirement for the tie‐beam‐to‐tie‐column
connection
7.11.8.10 Special lintel beams may be required across larger openings having a width exceeding 1.5 m.
Additional reinforcement bars need to be provided. Lintel beams can be integrated with the tie‐beams
at the floor level.
7.11.8.11 Lap splices may not be less than 60 bar diameters or 500mm in length. Splicing should take place at
column mid height, except for the ground floor level (where splicing is not permitted).
7.11.8.12 The minimum wall thickness should not be less than 100 mm. The wall height/thickness ratio should
not exceed 30.
7.11.8.13 Toothed edges should be left on each side of the wall, as shown in Figure 6.7.16 a. Toothed edges are
essential for adequate wall confinement, which contributes to satisfactory earthquake performance.
Alternatively, when the interface between the masonry wall and the concrete tie‐column needs to
remain smooth for appearance’s sake, steel dowels should be provided in mortar bed joints to ensure
interaction between the masonry and the concrete during an earthquake (Figure 6.7.16 b).

a) b)
Fig. 6.7.16: a) Toothed wall construction; b) horizontal dowels at the
wall‐to‐column interface
7.11.8.14 Concrete in the tie‐columns can be poured once the desired wall height has been reached. The
masonry walls provide formwork for the tie‐columns on two sides; however the formwork must be
placed on the remaining two sides.
7.11.9 Foundation and Plinth Construction
The foundation should be constructed as in traditional brick masonry construction. Either an uncoursed random
rubble stone masonry footing or a RC strip footing can be used. A RC plinth band should be constructed on top

6‐412 Vol. 2

of the foundation. In confined masonry construction, plinth band is essential for preventing building settlements
in soft soil areas. An alternative foundation solution with RC strip footing is also illustrated in Figure 6.7.17.

a) b)
Fig. 6.7.17: Foundation construction: a) RC plinth band and stone
masonry foundation; b) RC strip footing


BNBC 2012 Part 6 Chapter 6 and 7 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

BNBC 2012 Part 6 Chapter 6 and 7 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

BNBC 2012 Part 6 Chapter 6 and 7 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Chapter 6

= Ratio of to , see 6.3.15.1(b), Sec 6.2

6.1.2.6 For structural concrete, shall not be less than 17 MPa. No maximum value of

6.1.5.2 Redistribution of moments shall be made only when is equal to or greater than 0.0075 at

6.1.7.1 Modulus of elasticity, , for concrete shall be permitted to be taken as . 0.043 (in

6.1.7.2 Modulus of elasticity, , for reinforcement shall be permitted to be taken as 200,000 MPa.

6.1.14.8 For joist construction, shall be permitted to be 10 percent more than that specified in Sec

6.2.2.1 Required strength shall be at least equal to the effects of factored loads in such

6.2.3.2 Strength reduction factor shall be as given in 6.2.3.2.1 through 6.2.3.2.6:

6.2.3.2.4 Shear and torsion 0.75

6.2.3.2.7 Calculation of development length specified in Sec 8.2 does not require a strength reduction

b) For diaphragms, for shear shall not exceed the minimum for shear used for the

6.2.3.4 Strength reduction factor shall be 0.60 for flexure, compression, shear, and bearing of

Simply supported One end Both ends Cantilever

Type of member Deflection to be considered Deflection

Floors not supporting or attached to Immediate deflection due to live load /360

Without drop panels‡ With drop panels‡

6.2.5.3.3 The minimum thickness, for slabs with beams spanning between the supports on all sides,

6.3.2.7.3 For between 17 and 28 MPa, shall be taken as 0.85. For above 28 MPa, shall be

6.3.3.3 Sections are compression‐controlled if the net tensile strain in the extreme tension steel, , is

6.3.3.5 Net tensile strain in the extreme tension steel at nominal strength, shall not be less than

6.3.3.5.1 Use of compression reinforcement shall be permitted in conjunction with additional tension

6.3.3.6 For compression members, design axial strength shall not be taken greater than , ,

, 0.85 0.85 – (6.3.2)

, 0.80 0.85 – (6.3.3)

6.3.4.1 Distance between lateral supports for a beam shall not exceed 50 times , the least width of

6.3.5.3 If, at every section, provided is at least one‐third greater than that required by analysis, the

6.3.5.4 For structural slabs and footings of uniform thickness, , in the direction of the span shall

6.3.6.4 The spacing of reinforcement closest to the tension face, , shall be less than that given by

380 2.5 (6.3.5)

6.3.7.3 Minimum area of flexural tension reinforcement, , , shall conform to 6.3.5.

6.3.9.1 For noncomposite compression members, the area of longitudinal reinforcement, , shall be

6.3.9.3 Volumetric spiral reinforcement ratio, , shall be not less than the value given by

0.45 1 6.3.6

0.80 25 1 0.5 0.875 (6.3.9)

6.3.10.6.3 The effective length factor, , shall be permitted to be taken as 1.0.

6.3.10.6.4 For members with no transverse load between supports, shall be taken as

6.3.10.6.5 Factored moment, , in Eq. (6.3.12) shall not be taken less than

6.3.10.7.3 The moment magnifier shall be calculated as

6.3.10.7.4 Alternatively, it shall be permitted to calculate as

where ∑ is the summation for all the factored vertical loads in a story and ∑ is the summation for all

6.3.13.5 For evaluation of slenderness effects, radius of gyration, , of a composite section shall be not

steel encasement shall be not less than for each face of width nor for circular

6.3.13.6.2 When computing and , longitudinal bars located within the encased concrete core shall

6.3.13.7.4 Longitudinal bars located within the spiral shall be permitted to be used in computing and

6.3.13.8.7 Longitudinal bars located within the ties shall be permitted to be used in computing and

A 2 is measured on this plane

0.005 0.85 1 0.005

By estimating an initial value of a, Eq (6.3.36) can be used to obtain an approximate value of

6.4.1.1.2 In evaluating , whenever applicable, effects of axial tension due to creep and shrinkage in

6.4.1.3 Computation of maximum at supports in accordance with 6.4.1.3.1 shall be permitted if all

6.4.1.3.1 Sections located less than a distance from face of support shall be permitted to be designed

but not greater than 0.29 . When computing by Eq. (6.4.5), / shall not be

⁄ shall be expressed in MPa. When as computed by Eq. (6.4.6) is negative, shall be

f) Beams constructed of steel fiber‐reinforced, normalweight concrete with not

6.4.3.6.3 Where circular ties, hoops, or spirals are used as shear reinforcement, shall be computed

Shear flow (q)

(a) Thin-walled tube

(b) Area enclosed by shear flow path

= _mm. =mm =_mm. =_mm. =_mm. =___mm. f c′